2018 Dodge Charger (Includes SRT 392/SRT Hellcat) User's Guide

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go 2018 directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only). DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY CHARGER www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records BOOKLET BY VISITING: and more. To get this information, just create an account USER and check back often. WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNER-MANUAL.HTML Get warranty and other information online – you can review (U.S. RESIDENTS); and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, GUIDE Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA USER GUIDE FIRST EDITION CHARGER provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting 18LD-926-AA www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). (CANADIAN RESIDENTS). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or owners.mopar.ca (Canada) DODGE.COM (U.S.) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. DODGE.CA (CANADA)

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of a convenient reference source for common questions. However, the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable For additional information on accessories to help personalize to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca WARNING! states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility (Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer. Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions to comply with all local laws. are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US This guide illustrates and describes the opera- For complete owner information, refer to your LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents pre- tion of features and equipment that are either Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ cision workmanship, distinctive styling, and standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or high quality. may also include a description of features and www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) equipment that are no longer available or were for further information. For your convenience, ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any the information contained on this site may also road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on features and equipment described in this guide be printed and saved for future reference. the steering wheel. You have full responsibility that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US and assume all risks related to the use of the FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our LLC reserves the right to make changes in de- features and applications in this vehicle. Only environment and natural resources. By convert- sign and specifications and/or make additions use the features and applications when it is safe ing from paper to electronic delivery for the to or improvements to its products without im- to do so. Failure to do so may result in an majority of the user information for your vehicle, posing any obligation upon itself to install them accident involving serious injury or death. together we greatly reduce the demand for tree- on products previously manufactured. based products and lessen the stress on our This User Guide has been prepared to help you environment. quickly become acquainted with the important When it comes to service, remember that your features of your vehicle. It contains most things authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has you will need to operate and maintain the ve- factory-trained technicians and genuine hicle, including emergency information. MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL To identify the chapter with the information WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS needed you can consult the index at the end of Essential Information this User Guide. While reading this User Guide you will find a series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent Each time direction instructions (left/right or Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi- incorrect use of components which could cause forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd accidents or injuries. given, these must be intended as regarding an page. A few pages further there is a key for occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not getting to know the chapter order and the rel- There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed complying with this rule will be properly speci- evant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway a to prevent against procedures that could result fied in the text. textual indication of the current chapter at the in damage to your vehicle. The figures in this User Guide are provided by side of each even page. way of example only: this might imply that some Symbols details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be ob- HOW TO USE THISIn MANUAL addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the served when using this component. left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.

2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE INDEX 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 6 INTERIOR ...... 7

5 INSTRUMENT PANEL GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Instrument Panel 1 — Air Vents 4 — Paddle Shifter (+) 2 — Paddle Shifter (-) 5 — Radio 3 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Steering Wheel

6 INTERIOR

Interior 1 — Power Window Switches/Door Locks 4 — Climate Controls 2 — Seats 5 — Switch Panel 3 — Gear Selector 6 — Glove Compartment

7 8 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .....11 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 26 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 33 KEYS ...... 12 Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . .27 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 33 KeyFob...... 12 Rear Head Restraints ...... 27 Wiper Operation ...... 33 Front Head Restraint Removal ...... 28 IGNITION SWITCH...... 14 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ....34 Rear Head Restraint Removal...... 28 Keyless Push Button Ignition ...... 14 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 35 STEERING WHEEL ...... 29 REMOTE START ...... 16 Automatic Climate Control Overview .....35 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . .29 Climate Control Functions...... 39 How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped . .16 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — General Information ...... 16 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped ...... 29 If Equipped ...... 40 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . .17 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . .30 Operating Tips ...... 40 To Arm The System ...... 17 EXTERIOR LIGHTS...... 31 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ...... 43 To Disarm The System ...... 17 Headlight Switch ...... 31 Opening Sunroof ...... 43 DOORS ...... 18 High/Low Beam Switch ...... 31 Closing Sunroof...... 44 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.....18 Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . .31 Venting Sunroof — Express ...... 44 Automatic Headlights ...... 32 SEATS...... 21 Pinch Protect Feature ...... 44 Flash-To-Pass ...... 32 Memory Seat ...... 21 HOOD ...... 44 Parking Lights ...... 32 Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 23 Headlights On With Wipers ...... 32 To Open The Hood ...... 44 Folding Rear Seat ...... 25 Turn Signals ...... 33 To Close The Hood ...... 45 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped .....33

9 TRUNK ...... 45 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Programming HomeLink To A Opening ...... 45 (HOMELINK) ...... 47 Miscellaneous Device ...... 49 Closing ...... 46 Before You Begin Programming Reprogramming A Single HomeLink HomeLink ...... 47 Button ...... 50 Trunk Safety...... 46 Erasing All The HomeLink Channels .....47 General Information ...... 50 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 50 Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...... 47 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 50 Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door Opener...... 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

10 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — • Maintenance • Multilingual nect and no external device needed for play- IF EQUIPPED schedules and back. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in information real-time, so it never goes out of date. Access your Owner’s Information – right through • Comprehensive Features/Benefits your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen radio icon & symbol glossary • Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen — If Equipped radio To access the Vehicle User Guide on your • Enhanced search and browsing capability Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect • Robust NAV application — If Equipped Apps button, then press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect regis- • Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites tration is required. category • Icon and symbol glossary NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available • Warranty information while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access • Crucial driver information and assistance: while the vehicle is in motion, the system will • Operating • Maintenance display: Feature not available while the vehicle Instructions Schedules Vehicle User Guide Home Screen is in motion. • Warranty • Emergency Pre-Installed Features Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you Information Procedures • Fluid Level • 911 Contact • Your User Guide • Available when will be able to explore your warranty information Standards and More — Updated in and where and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect radio will display the Ve- real-time you need it Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to hicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to • Touchscreen • Customizable add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the convenience interface assist in better understanding your vehicle. future. There’s no app to download, no phone to con-

11 KEYS NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is Key Fob disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled. Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Re- mote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Key- less Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.

Enhanced Search And NOTE: Browsing Capability The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the Key Fob doors and trunk from distances up to approxi- 1 — Trunk Open 4 — Remote Start

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE mately 66 feet (20 m) using a handheld key fob. 2 — Unlock 5 — Panic Button The key fob does not need to be pointed at the 3 — Lock 6 — Emergency vehicle to activate the system. Key Icon And Symbol Glossary NOTE: SRT vehicles, equipped with the 6.2L Super- The key fob also contains an emergency key, charged engine, come with three key fobs (two red and one black) that allow for different en- which stores in the rear of the key fob. gine power levels. Please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for further descriptions. 12 The emergency key allows for entry into the The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge turn on. Refer to “Interior Lights,” in “Getting vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system To Know Your Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual at key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for will also be activated. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- NOTE: can keep the emergency key with you when nadian Residents) for further information. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” valet parking. in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ To Lock The Doors And Trunk To remove the emergency key, slide the me- en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) Push and release the lock button on the key fob chanical release button on the back of the key or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) to lock all doors. fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the for further information. key out with your other hand. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” • Unlock the driver door on the first push of the in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ NOTE: key fob unlock button. en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) In case the ignition switch does not change with • Unlock all doors on the first push of the key or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) the push of a button, the key fob may have a low fob unlock button. for further information. or dead battery. In this situation, a backup NOTE: method can be used to operate the ignition Unlock The Trunk To lock the doors with passive entry, Refer to switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side Push and release the trunk unlock button on the “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located opposite of the Emergency Key) against the key fob once to unlock the trunk. in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for ENGINE START/STOP button and push to oper- NOTE: further information. ate the ignition switch. To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry, If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is To Unlock The Doors And Trunk Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your automatically if the key is left inside the passen- Unlock The Doors Vehicle” for further information. ger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay Push and release the unlock button on the key When you use the key fob to open any door, the locked. fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach within five seconds to unlock all doors. lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will 13 Request For Additional Remote Controls General Information IGNITION SWITCH The following regulatory statement applies to all NOTE: Keyless Push Button Ignition Only key fobs that are programmed to the ve- radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this hicle electronics can be used to start and oper- vehicle: This feature allows the driver to operate the ate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC ignition with the push of a button as long as the to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt key fob is in the passenger compartment. other vehicle. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four op- following two conditions: erating positions, three of which are labeled and WARNING! 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- will illuminate when in position. The three po- • Always remove the key fobs from the ve- ence, and sitions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth hicle and lock all doors when leaving the 2. This device must accept any interference position is START. During start, ON/RUN will vehicle unattended. received, including interference that may illuminate. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter- cause undesired operation. NOTE: N-Go — Ignition, always remember to If the ignition switch does not change with the place the ignition in the OFF mode. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- push of a button, the key fob may have a low or Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an proved by the party responsible for compliance dead battery. In this situation, a back up GETTING TO KNOW YOURauthorized VEHICLE dealer. This procedure consists of could void the user’s authority to operate the method can be used to operate the ignition programming a blank key fob to the vehicle equipment. switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the electronics. A blank key fob is one that has emergency key) of the key fob against the EN- never been programmed. GINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. 14 RUN WARNING! • Driving position. ate power windows, other controls, or move • All the electrical devices are available. the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside START parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior • The engine will start. heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove CAUTION! the key fob from the vehicle and lock your An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for vehicle. thieves. Always remove key fob from the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the with access to an unlocked vehicle. START/STOP Ignition Button vehicle unattended. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- The push button ignition can be placed in the tended is dangerous for a number of rea- NOTE: following modes: sons. A child or others could be seriously or Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting And fatally injured. Children should be warned Operating" in the Owner’s Manual at OFF not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • The engine is stopped. or the gear selector. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca • Do not leave the key fob in or near the (Canadian Residents) for further information. • Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- alarm, etc.) are still available. dren, and do not leave the ignition of a ACC vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could oper- • Engine is not started. • Some electrical devices are available. 15 REMOTE START • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) WARNING! door locks or other controls could cause How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped • Battery at an acceptable charge level serious injury or death. • Check engine light shall not be present Push remote start button on the • PANIC button not pushed key fob twice within five seconds. General Information Pushing the remote start button a • System not disabled from previous remote third time shuts the engine off. start event The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, push • Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing vehicle: the ignition to the ON/RUN position. • Ignition in STOP/OFF position This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC NOTE: • Fuel level meets minimum requirement Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt • With remote start, the engine will only run for • Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is intrusion following two conditions: placed in the ON/RUN position. 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- • The vehicle must be started with the key after WARNING! ence, and two consecutive timeouts. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • Do not start or run an engine in a closed 2. This device must accept any interference All of the following conditions must be met garage or confined area. Exhaust gas con- received, including interference that may before the engine will remote start: tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor- cause undesired operation. • Gear selector in PARK less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or NOTE: • Doors closed death when inhaled. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- • Hood closed • Keep key fobs away from children. Opera- proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the • Trunk closed tion of the Remote Start System, windows, equipment. • Hazard switch off 16 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle, the vehicle: if equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — IF EQUIPPED Passive Entry,” located in “Doors” in “Getting • Push lock on the interior power door lock To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle switch with the driver and/or passenger doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless door open. • Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button push button ignition for unauthorized operation. (requires at least one valid key fob in the While the vehicle security alarm is armed, inte- • Push the lock button on the exterior Pas- vehicle). rior switches for door locks and trunk release are sive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the available in the same exterior zone (refer NOTE: to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry," vehicle security alarm will provide the following • The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm Your Vehicle" for further information). the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, the vehicle security alarm. and the vehicle security light in the instrument • Push the lock button on the key fob. cluster will flash. • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the 3. If any doors are open, close them. interior power door lock switches will not un- To Arm The System lock the doors. NOTE: Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security Security System Manual Override The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect alarm: your vehicle. However, you can create condi- The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in tions where the system will give you a false lock the doors using the manual door lock the OFF mode (refer to "Ignition Switch" in alarm. If one of the previously described arming plunger. this chapter for further information). sequences has occurred, the vehicle security To Disarm The System alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this using any of the following methods: occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Push the unlock button on the key fob. 17 If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle se- been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry curity alarm will remain armed when the battery door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the affected, resulting in a slower response time. horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the ve- • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and hicle security alarm. no door is opened within 60 seconds, the DOORS vehicle will re-lock and arm the security alarm (if equipped). Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry • The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle passive entry system if it is located The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to next to a mobile phone, lap top or other Grab The Door Handle To Unlock the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and electronic device; these devices may block a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature NOTE: the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, passive entry handle from locking/unlocking door(s) without having to push the key fob lock all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the the vehicle. or unlock buttons. front driver’s door handle. For further informa- To Unlock From The Driver's Side tion regarding selecting “Unlock Driver Door 1st NOTE: Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft • Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- front driver door handle to unlock the driver's care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian door automatically. The interior door panel lock www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for Residents) for further information. knob will raise when the door is unlocked. further information.

18 To Unlock From The Passenger Side 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive • Three attempts are made to lock the doors Entry key fob while a door is open. using the door panel switch and then close the With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft doors. (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry front passenger door handle to unlock all four door handle while a door is open. To Enter The Trunk doors automatically. The interior door panel lock 3. A lock request is made by the door panel With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft knob will raise when the door is unlocked. switch while the door is open. (1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the NOTE: When any of these situations occur, after all right side of CHMSL (Center High Mounted All doors will unlock when the front passenger open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will Stop Light), which is located on the deck lid. door handle is grabbed, regardless of the driv- be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob er’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock inside the car and it does not find any Passive Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will Press”). unlock and alert the customer.

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry NOTE: Key Fob In Vehicle The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a To minimize the possibility of unintentionally valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will with an automatic door unlock feature which not unlock the doors when any of the following will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF conditions are true: position. • The doors are locked manually using the door lock knobs. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with pas- Trunk Passive Entry Button sive entry. There are three situations that trigger • There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry ve- the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either hicle. Passive Entry door handle. 19 NOTE: Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the The vehicle doors can also be locked by using If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive door handle lock button. This could unlock the the key fob lock button or the lock button Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the door(s). located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, General Information unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive En- try key fobs is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft The following regulatory statement applies to all (1.5 m) of the deck lid. radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the front door handles, push the door handle lock following two conditions: button to lock all four doors. 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- Do NOT Grab The Door Handle ence, and When Locking 2. This device must accept any interference NOTE: received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or NOTE: unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry Changes or modifications not expressly ap- door handle. This is done to allow you to check proved by the party responsible for compliance if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door could void the user’s authority to operate the handle, without the vehicle reacting and un- equipment. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock locking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. 20 SEATS Memory Seat

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint This feature allows the driver to store up to two System of the vehicle. different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains WARNING! desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, station presets. Your remote keyless entry key people riding in these areas are more likely fob can also be programmed to recall the same to be seriously injured or killed. positions when the unlock button is pushed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats NOTE: and seat belts. In a collision, people riding If your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, in these areas are more likely to be seri- one key fob can be linked to memory position Memory Seat Switches ously injured or killed. 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat position 2. Programming The Memory Feature and using a seat belt properly. The memory seat switch is located on the driv- NOTE: er’s door trim panel. The switch consists of three To create a new memory profile, perform the buttons: The set (S) button, which is used to following: activate the memory save function, and the memory (1) and (2) buttons, which are used to 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN recall either of two pre-programmed memory position (Do not start the engine). profiles. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets). 21 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the NOTE: 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and memory switch. Before programming your key fobs you must select release the set (S) button on the memory the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal Settings 4. Within five seconds, push and release either switch, then push and release memory but- Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instru- ton (1) or memory button (2) accordingly. system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in ment cluster display will display which “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at the instrument cluster display. memory position has been set. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html 4. Push and release the lock button on the key NOTE: (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. fob within 10 seconds. • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in To program your key fobs, perform the following: NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked from your PARK to recall a memory profile. 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, position. • To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to and within 10 seconds push the unlock button “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless 2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The on the key fob. Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section. system will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for the system to complete the Memory Position Recall Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless memory recall before continuing to step NOTE: Entry Key Fob To Memory three. The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory GETTING TO KNOW YOURYour VEHICLE key fobs can be programmed to recall one NOTE: positions. If a recall is attempted when the of two pre-programmed memory profiles by If a memory profile has not already been set, vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in pushing the unlock button on the key fob. refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" the instrument cluster display. in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile. To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push memory button (1) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.

22 NOTE: Easy Entry/Exit Seat NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when This feature provides automatic driver seat po- memory settings will be recalled with a Passive the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The sitioning to enhance driver mobility when enter- Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later dis- ing and exiting the vehicle. fob linked to position 1. abled) through the programmable features in the To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push The distance the driver seat moves depends on Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in memory button (2) on the driver's door or the where you have the driver seat positioned when “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at unlock button on the key fob linked to memory you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html position 2. tion. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further details. NOTE: • When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the OFF position, the driver seat will move about Heated Seats — If Equipped memory settings will be recalled with a Passive 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches On some models, the front and rear seats may fob linked to position 2. (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat be equipped with heaters located in the seat will return to its previously set position when cushions and seat backs. A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver's door RUN position. WARNING! during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat or power tilt and telescopic steering • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of when the driver seat position is less than skin because of advanced age, chronic one second will occur before another recall can 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi- be selected. stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy physical condition must exercise care Entry. when using the seat heater. It may cause Each stored memory setting will have an asso- burns even at low temperatures, especially ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. if used for long periods of time

23 WARNING! If the HI-level setting is selected, the system WARNING! will automatically switch to LO-level after ap- • Do not place anything on the seat or seat- proximately 60 minutes of continuous opera- • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the back that insulates against heat, such as a tion. At that time, the display will change from skin because of advanced age, chronic blanket or cushion. This may cause the HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi- seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat setting will turn off automatically after approxi- cation, alcohol use, exhaustion or other that has been overheated could cause se- mately 45 minutes. physical condition must exercise care rious burns due to the increased surface when using the seat heater. It may cause temperature of the seat. NOTE: burns even at low temperatures, especially • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be if used for long periods of time Front Heated Seats felt within two to five minutes. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a The front heated seats control buttons are lo- • The engine must be running for the heated blanket or cushion. This may cause the cated within the climate or controls screen of seats to operate. the touchscreen. seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start that has been overheated could cause se- You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat set- rious burns due to the increased surface tings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen but- On models that are equipped with remote start, temperature of the seat. tons indicate the level of heat in use. Two the heated seats can be programmed to come

GETTING TO KNOW YOURindicator VEHICLE arrows will illuminate for HI, one for on during a remote start. Rear Heated Seats LO and none for OFF. This feature can be programmed through the On some models, the two outboard seats are • Press the heated seat button once to turn Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” equipped with heated seats. The heated seat the HI setting on. in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at switches for these seats are located on the rear www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Press the heated seat button a second of the center console. There are two heated seat time to turn the LO setting on. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca switches that allow the rear passengers to (Canadian Residents) for further details. operate the seats independently. • Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off. 24 You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. Front Ventilated Seats Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start The indicator lights in each switch indicate the If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, On models that are equipped with remote start, level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will the seat cushion and seat back will have fans the ventilated seats can be programmed to illuminate for HI, one for LO, and none for off. that draw the air from the passenger compart- come on during a remote start. • Push the heated seat button once to ment and move air through fine perforations in select HI-level heating. the seat cover to help keep the driver and front This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” • Push the heated seat button a second passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera- in “Mulitmedia” in the Owner's Manual at time to select LO-level heating. tures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Push the heated seat button a third time (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- to turn the heating elements off. The front ventilated seats control buttons are nadian Residents) for further information. located within the Uconnect system. You can NOTE: gain access to the control buttons through the Folding Rear Seat • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be climate screen or the controls screen. felt within two to five minutes. The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to • Press the ventilated seat button once to provide an additional storage area. To fold the • The engine must be running for the heated choose HI. rear seatback, pull on the loops located on the seats to operate. • Press the ventilated seat button a second upper seatback. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will time to choose LO. NOTE: automatically switch to LO-level after approxi- • Press the ventilated seat button a third These loops can be tucked away when not in mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At time to turn the ventilated seat off. that time, the number of illuminated LEDs use. changes from two to one, indicating the change. NOTE: The LO-level setting will turn off automatically The engine must be running for the ventilated after approximately 45 minutes. seats to operate.

25 When the seatback is folded to the upright HEAD RESTRAINTS position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk strap. of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-impact. Head restraints should WARNING! be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not WARNING! securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child • All occupants, including the driver, should seats and/or passengers. An improperly not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s latched seat could cause serious injury. seat until the head restraints are placed in • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle their proper positions in order to minimize (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or Rear Seat Loop the risk of neck injury in the event of a folded down position) should not be used crash. After releasing the seatback, it can be folded as a play area by children when the vehicle • Head restraints should never be adjusted forward. is in motion. They could be seriously while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a injured in a collision. Children should be GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE vehicle with the head restraints improperly NOTE: seated and using the proper restraint adjusted or removed could cause serious You may experience deformation in the seat system. injury or death in the event of a collision. cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. NOTE: This is normal and by simply opening the seats Do not reverse the head restraints (making the to the open position, over time the seat cushion rear of the head restraint face forward) in an will return to its normal shape. attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.

26 Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats WARNING! The front driver and passenger seats are straints in a location outside the occupant equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). compartment. In the event of a rear impact, the RHRs will • ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- automatically extend forward minimizing the stalled in the vehicle to properly protect gap between the back of the occupants head the occupants. Follow the re-installation and the RHR. instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. The RHRs will automatically return to their • Do not place items over the top of the normal position following a rear impact. If the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, RHRs do not return to their normal position, see seat covers or portable DVD players. These your authorized dealer immediately. items may interfere with the operation of To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push Adjustment Button the adjustment button located at the base of the or death. 1 — Release Button head restraint and push downward on the head 2 — Adjustment Button restraint. Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two adjustable NOTE: positions: up or down. When the center seat is To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it WARNING! being occupied, the head restraint should be in can go then push the release button and the the raised position. When there are no occu- adjustment button at the base of each post • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a pants in the center seat, the head restraint can while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall collision or hard stop could cause serious be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. the head restraint, put the head restraint posts injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust Always securely stow removed head re- the head restraint to the appropriate height. 27 To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the • The outboard head restraints are not WARNING! head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push adjustable. the adjustment button located at the base of the • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a head restraint and push downward on the head WARNING! collision or hard stop could cause serious restraint. injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled Always securely stow removed head rein the vehicle to properly protect the occu- straints in a location outside the occupant pants. Follow the re-installation instructions compartment. above prior to operating the vehicle or occu- • ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- pying a seat. stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation Front Head Restraint Removal instructions above prior to operating the To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as vehicle or occupying a seat. it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post Rear Head Restraint Removal while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall To remove the center head restraint, push the the head restraint, put the head restraint posts adjustment button and the release button while into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate pulling upward on the whole assembly. To rein- GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE height. stall the head restraint, put the head restraint Adjustment Button posts into the holes and adjust it to the appro- NOTE: priate height. NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 de- • The head restraint should only be removed by grees to the incorrect position in an attempt to qualified technicians, for service purposes gain additional clearance to the back of the only. If the center rear head restraints requires head. removal, see your authorized dealer.

28 WARNING! WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a Do not adjust the steering column while driv- collision or hard stop could cause serious ing. Adjusting the steering column while injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. driving or driving with the steering column Always securely stow removed head re- unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con- straints in a location outside the occupant trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn- compartment. ing may result in serious injury or death. • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column the occupants. Follow the re-installation — If Equipped instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle lengthen or shorten the steering column. The STEERING WHEEL power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is To unlock the steering column, pull the lever Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column located below the multifunction lever on the downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering column. This feature allows you to tilt the steering col- steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or umn upward or downward. It also allows you to To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the lengthen or shorten the steering column. The the steering wheel outward or push it inward as steering column, pull the lever toward you or tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steer- desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever away from you as desired. ing wheel at the end of the steering column. push the lever upward until fully engaged.

29 NOTE: mental temperatures. The heated steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when On models that are equipped with remote start, you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the steering wheel is already warm. the heated steering wheel can be programmed to the memory switch on the driver's door trim The heated steering wheel control button is come on during a remote start through the panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering col- located within the Uconnect system. You can Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” umn to pre-programmed positions. Refer to gain access to the control button through the in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at “Driver Memory Seat” in this section. climate screen or the controls screen. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Press the heated steering wheel button (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca WARNING! once to turn the heating element on. (Canadian Residents) for further information. Do not adjust the steering column while • Press the heated steering wheel button a driving. Adjusting the steering column while second time to turn the heating element off. WARNING! driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con- If your vehicle is equipped with automatic tem- • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn- perature controls with an integrated center skin because of advanced age, chronic ing may result in serious injury or death. stack, or manual temperature controls, you’ll illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medi- find the heated steering wheel switch on the cation, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped switch bank below the radio screen. physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The steering wheel contains a heating element may cause burns even at low tempera- The engine must be running for the heated that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The tures, especially if used for long periods. steering wheel to operate. heated steering wheel has only one temperature • Do not place anything on the steering setting. Once the heated steering wheel has wheel that insulates against heat, such as been turned on, it will stay on for an average of a blanket or steering wheel covers of any 80 minutes or more before automatically shut- type and material. This may cause the ting off. This time will vary based on environ- steering wheel heater to overheat.

30 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the NOTE: first detent for parking light and instrument • The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control Headlight Switch panel light operation. Rotate the headlight can be turned on or off using the Uconnect switch to the second detent for headlight, park- System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in ing light and instrument panel light operation. The headlight switch is located on the left side “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at of the instrument panel. This switch controls High/Low Beam Switch www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html the operation of the headlights, parking lights, (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca Push the multifunction lever away from you to instrument panel lights, instrument panel light (Canadian Residents) for further information. switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and multifunction lever toward you to switch the equipped). taillights of vehicles in the field of view will headlights back to low beam. cause headlights to remain on longer (closer Automatic High Beam — If Equipped to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control will cause the system to function improperly. system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through If the windshield or Automatic High Beam the use of a digital camera mounted on the Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror inside rearview mirror. This camera detects ve- must be re-aimed to ensure proper perfor- Headlight Switch hicle specific light and automatically switches mance. See your local authorized dealer. from high beams to low beams until the ap- 1 — Automatic Headlights To Activate proaching vehicle is out of view. 2 — Rotate Headlight Switch 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO head- 3 — Rotate Dimmer light position. 4 — Rotate Ambient 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode. 31 NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in Parking Lights This system will not activate until the vehicle is your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ Turn the headlight switch knob to the first de- at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for tent to turn the parking lights on. This also turns To Deactivate further information. on all instrument panel lighting. 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or To turn the automatic system off, move the Headlights On With Wipers rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate headlight switch out of the AUTO position. When this feature is active, the headlights will the system (normal operation of low beams). NOTE: turn on after the wipers are turned on if the 2. Push back on the multifunction lever to The engine must be running before the head- headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position reactivate the system. lights will come on in the automatic mode. and programmable feature is set to on. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers Automatic Headlights Flash-To-Pass are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. This system automatically turns the headlights You can signal another vehicle with your head- on or off according to ambient light levels. To lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever NOTE: turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch toward you. This will turn on the high beam The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When headlights until the lever is released. be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. the system is on, the headlight time delay fea- Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Program- NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOURture VEHICLE is also on. This means the headlights will mable Features” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ pass position for more than 20 seconds, the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or high beams will shut off. time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/ www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for 90 seconds. further information.

32 Turn Signals INTERIOR LIGHTS WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND

Move the multifunction lever up or down and The interior lights come on when a door is WASHERS the arrows on each side of the instrument clus- opened. ter display flash to show proper operation of the The multifunction lever operates the windshield front and rear turn signal lights. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in off automatically ten minutes after the ignition the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction NOTE: is moved to the OFF position. This will occur if lever is located on the left side of the steering • If either light remains on and does not flash, or the interior lights were switched on manually or column. are on because a door is open. The Battery there is a very fast flash rate, check for a Wiper Operation defective outside light bulb. If an indicator Protection also includes the glove compartment fails to light when the lever is moved, it would light and the trunk light. To restore interior light Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. operation after automatic battery protection is first detent, past the intermittent settings for enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in • A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the low-speed wiper operation, or to the second the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch. instrument cluster display and a continuous detent past the intermittent settings for high- chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more speed wiper operation. than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Lane Change Assist — If Equipped Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

33 CAUTION! for road splash or overspray from the windshield The Rain Sensing system has protection washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of features for the wiper blades and arms, and will • Turn the windshield wipers off when driv- the multifunction lever to one of four settings to not operate under the following conditions: ing through an automatic car wash. Dam- activate this feature. • Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni- age to the windshield wipers may result if The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing the wiper control is left in any position with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay posi- system will not operate until the wiper switch other than off. tion 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting switch and allow the wipers to return to the than 32°F (0°C). park position before turning off the engine. 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in freeze to the windshield, damage to the desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing sys- wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place tem will not operate until the wiper switch is restarted. the wiper switch in the off position when not moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph • Always remove any buildup of snow that using the system. (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of prevents the windshield wiper blades from NOTE: the NEUTRAL position. returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE blades cannot return to the off position, when the wiper switch is in the low or high- Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the damage to the wiper motor may occur. speed position. Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” • The Rain Sensing feature may not function in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped properly when ice, or dried salt water is pres- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca This feature senses rain or snowfall on the ent on the windshield. (Canadian Residents) for further information. windshield and automatically activates the wip- • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or ers for the driver. The feature is especially useful silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

34 CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Automatic Climate Control Overview NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Controls

35 Icon Description

MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.

36 Icon Description Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.

Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate, or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

SYNC Button Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Faceplate Knob

Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. Touchscreen Buttons The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

37 Icon Description Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix Mode GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.

38 CAUTION! For improved fuel economy, press the A/C but- In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position ton to turn off the air conditioning and manually can be adjusted to desired user settings. Press- Failure to follow these cautions can cause adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. ing other settings will cause the MAX A/C opera- damage to the heating elements: Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, tion to switch to the selected setting and MAX • Use care when washing the inside of the or Floor modes. A/C to exit. rear window. Do not use abrasive window NOTE: Recirculation cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash- • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high ing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may ing elements. Labels can be peeled off speed if needed. wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the after soaking with warm water. Recirculation control button. The recirculation • If your air conditioning performance seems • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, indicator will illuminate when this button is lower than expected, check the front of the or abrasive window cleaners on the inte- selected. Press the button a second time to turn A/C condenser (located in front of the radia- rior surface of the window. off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air tor), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the into the vehicle. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front window. of the radiator and through the condenser. NOTE: Climate Control Functions In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may MAX A/C lead to excessive window fogging. The recircu- A/C (Air Conditioning) MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling lation feature may be unavailable (button on the performance. touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the could create fogging on the inside of the wind- operator to manually activate or deactivate the Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C shield. air conditioning system. When the air condition- and the prior settings. The button illuminates ing system is turned on, cool dehumidified air when MAX A/C is on. will flow through the outlets into the cabin.

39 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — NOTE: Manual Operation Override If Equipped • It is not necessary to move the temperature This system offers a full complement of manual settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system Automatic Operation override features. The AUTO symbol in the front automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, ATC display will be turned off when the system 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or and blower speed to provide comfort as is being used in the manual mode. the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the quickly as possible. Operating Tips Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like Metric units by selecting the US/Metric NOTE: the system to maintain by adjusting the customer-programmable feature. Refer to the Refer to the chart at the end of this section for driver and passenger temperature control “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your suggested control settings for various weather buttons. Once the desired temperature is Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ conditions. displayed, the system will achieve and auto- care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or matically maintain that comfort level. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) Summer Operation for further information. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort The engine cooling system must be protected level, it is not necessary to change the set- To provide you with maximum comfort in the with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide tings. You will experience the greatest effi- Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the proper corrosion protection and to protect ciency by simply allowing the system to blower fan will remain on low until the engine against engine overheating. OAT coolant (con-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE function automatically. warms up. The blower will increase in speed and forming to MS.90032) is recommended. transition into Auto mode.

40 Winter Operation Window Fogging Cabin Air Filter To ensure the best possible heater and defroster Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in The climate control system filters out dust and performance, make sure the engine cooling sys- mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer tem is functioning properly and the proper windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and in- to service your cabin air filter, and to have it amount, type, and concentration of coolant is crease the front blower speed. Do not use the replaced when needed. used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Recirculation mode without A/C for long peri- Winter months is not recommended, because it ods, as fogging may occur. may cause window fogging. Outside Air Intake Vacation/Storage Make sure the air intake, located directly in Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake run the air conditioning system at idle for about may reduce airflow, and if they enter the ple- five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting num, they could plug the water drains. In winter on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri- months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, cation to minimize the possibility of compressor slush, and snow. damage when the system is started again.

41 Operating Tips Chart GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

42 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Opening Sunroof Express The power sunroof switch is located between • Never leave children unattended in a ve- the sun visors on the overhead console. hicle, or with access to an unlocked ve- Push the switch rearward and release it within hicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- open automatically and stop when the full open dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle position is reached. This is called “Express equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the Open.” During Express Open operation, any ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, par- other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop ticularly unattended children, can become the sunroof. entrapped by the power sunroof while op- Manual Mode erating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch death. rearward. The sunroof will move rearward and • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being automatically stop at full open position. Any thrown from a vehicle with an open sun- release of the switch will stop the movement. roof. You could also be seriously injured or The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly partially opened condition until the sunroof Power Sunroof Switch and make sure all passengers are also switch is pushed again. properly secured. 1 — Opening Sunroof • Do not allow small children to operate the 2 — Venting Sunroof sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other 3 — Closing Sunroof body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

43 Closing Sunroof Venting Sunroof — Express HOOD Express Push and release the Vent button within one To Open The Hood half second and the sunroof will open to the Push the switch forward and release it within vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and Two latches must be released to open the hood. one-half second and the sunroof will close au- it will occur regardless of sunroof position. Dur- tomatically from any position. The sunroof will 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the ing Express Vent operation, any other actuation close fully and stop automatically. This is called left side of the instrument panel. of the switch will stop the sunroof. “Express Close.” During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop Pinch Protect Feature the sunroof. This feature will detect an obstruction in the Manual Mode closing of the sunroof during the Express Close To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch operation. If an obstruction in the path of the forward. The sunroof will move forward and sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati- automatically stop at full closed position. Any cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this release of the switch will stop the movement occurs. and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed NOTE: condition until the sunroof switch is pushed If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- GETTING TO KNOW YOURagain. VEHICLE sult in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. Hood Release

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.

44 3. Reach under the center front edge of the TRUNK NOTE: hood and push and hold the safety catch Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” lever to the left. Opening in ”Doors” in Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information on trunk operation with the 4. Lift the hood upward to the open position. The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle Passive Entry feature. To Close The Hood using the power trunk button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering Opening From Inside The Vehicle wheel. WARNING! Interior Power Trunk Release The trunk lid can be released from outside the Be sure the hood is fully latched before The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle vehicle by pushing the trunk button on the key driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully using the power trunk release button located on fob twice within five seconds or by using the latched, it could open when the vehicle is in the instrument panel to the left of the steering external release switch located on the underside motion and block your vision. Failure to fol- wheel. low this warning could result in serious injury of the decklid overhang. The release feature will or death. function only when the vehicle is in the unlock NOTE: condition. The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate. CAUTION! With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open symbol will display in the instrument Opening From Outside The Vehicle To prevent possible damage, do not slam the cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately odometer display will reappear once the trunk is To Unlock/Open The Trunk 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to closed. close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both The trunk may be unlocked/opened using either latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk of the following methods: fully closed, with both latches engaged. open symbol will display until the trunk is • Key Fob Trunk Release Button closed. • Passive Entry Button

45 Key Fob Trunk Release Button Closing WARNING! Push the power trunk button on With one or more hands placed on the outside the key fob twice within five sec- trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from onds to release the trunk. hear the trunk lock latch into place. outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Passive Entry Button NOTE: Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key is unattended. Once in the trunk, young Push the trunk passive entry button which is fob isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will children may not be able to escape, even if located on the back of the trunk lid. With a valid latch then automatically unlock if the key fob is they entered through the rear seat. If trapped Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the sensed not allowing the key fob to be locked in in the trunk, children can die from suffoca- trunk, push the passive entry button to open the the trunk area. tion or heat stroke. trunk. Trunk Safety Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

Trunk Passive Entry Button 46 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER • To operate HomeLink, push and release any of Erasing All The HomeLink Channels the programmed HomeLink buttons. These (HOMELINK) buttons will activate the devices they are pro- To erase the channels, follow this procedure: grammed to with each press of the corre- 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN sponding HomeLink button. position. • The HomeLink indicator light is located above 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink the center button. buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or Before You Begin Programming HomeLink until the HomeLink indicator light flashes. NOTE: For efficient programming and accurate trans- Erasing all channels should only be performed mission of the radio-frequency signal, it is rec- when programming HomeLink for the first time. ommended that a new battery be placed in the Do not erase channels when programming addi- hand-held transmitter of the device that is being tional buttons. programmed to the HomeLink system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling to activate the device you are trying to program Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device • HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held your HomeLink button to. Before programming a device to one of your transmitters that operate devices such as ga- Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the HomeLink buttons, you must determine rage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or garage before you begin programming. home security systems. The HomeLink unit is whether the device has a rolling code or non- powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. It is recommended that you erase all the chan- rolling code. nels of your HomeLink before you use it for the • The HomeLink buttons that are located in the first time. overhead console or sunvisor designate the three different HomeLink channels. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 47 Rolling Code Devices Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the HomeLink indicator light. The To determine if your device has a rolling code, a Opener good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typi- HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly To program any of the HomeLink buttons to and then rapidly. Once this happens, release cally, devices manufactured after 1995 have activate your garage door opener motor, follow both buttons. rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will the steps below: also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button lo- NOTE: NOTE: cated where the antenna is attached to the Make sure the garage door opener motor is device. The button may not be immediately All HomeLink buttons are programmed using plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ visible when looking at the device. The name this procedure. You do not need to erase all non-rolling code final steps. and color of the button may vary slightly by channels when programming additional but- manufacturer. tons. Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE: 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN NOTE: The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the position. You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling button you normally use to operate the device. 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter code final step 2, after completing rolling code 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the final step 1. Non-rolling Code Devices HomeLink button you wish to program, while 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the Most devices manufactured before 1995 will keeping the HomeLink indicator light in garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”

GETTING TO KNOW YOURnot VEHICLE have a rolling code. These devices will also view. button. This can usually be found where the not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you hanging antenna wire is attached to the want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and garage door opener transmitter button you release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. are trying to replicate . 2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete. 48 3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to WARNING! Programming HomeLink To A confirm that the garage door opener motor Miscellaneous Device operates. If the garage door opener motor • Your motorized door or gate will open and Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage does not operate, repeat the final steps for close while you are programming the uni- Door Opener” for the procedure on how to pro- the rolling code procedure. versal transceiver. Do not program the gram HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it transceiver if people or pets are in the path Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final follows the same procedure. Be sure to deter- of the door or gate. Steps mine if the device has a rolling code, or non- • Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage rolling code before beginning the programming 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink or confined area while programming the process. button and observe the HomeLink indicator transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is NOTE: on constantly, programming is complete. odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is Canadian radio frequency laws require transmit- 2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to poisonous when inhaled and can cause ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several confirm that the garage door opener motor you and others to be severely injured or seconds of transmission, which may not be long operates. If the garage door opener motor killed. enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal does not operate, repeat the steps from the during programming. Similar to this Canadian beginning. law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be preformed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink buttons.

49 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button General Information INTERNAL EQUIPMENT To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has The following regulatory statement applies to all Electrical Power Outlets been previously trained, without erasing all the Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure vehicle: Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt to determine whether the new device you want (13 Amp) power outlet on the instrument panel This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC to program the HomeLink button to has a Roll- and one 12 Volt (10 Amp) power outlet in the Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt ing Code, or Non-rolling Code. center console that can be used to power cellu- RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the lar phones, small electronics and other low 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position, following two conditions: without starting the engine. powered electrical accessories. The power out- 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- lets are labeled with either a “key” or a “bat- 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button ence, and tery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is pow- until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to 2. This device must accept any interference ered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the received, including interference that may powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or button. cause undesired operation. ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “battery” are connected directly to the battery Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A NOTE: and powered at all times. Garage Door Opener” and follow all remain- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE: ing steps. proved by the party responsible for compliance GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE could void the user’s authority to operate the • All accessories connected to the “battery” equipment. powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

50 • To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a In addition to the front power outlet, there is NOTE: Mopar knob and element must be used. also a power outlet located in the storage area of If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the the center console. maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the The front power outlet is located inside the center console power outlet. When the Media storage area on the center stack of the instru- Hub is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to ment panel. 160 Watts (13 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet WARNING!

Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.

51 Power Outlet Fuses 1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Integrated Center Stack / Dual USB Charge Only Ports 2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console / Media Hub

NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear

GETTING TO KNOW YOURconsole VEHICLE USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. Refer to “Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

52 WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION! • After the use of high power draw accesso- To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in ries or long periods of the vehicle not being • Only devices designed for use in this type draw power from the vehicle's battery even started (with accessories still plugged in), of outlet should be inserted into any when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, the vehicle must be driven a sufficient 12 Volt outlet. etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long length of time to allow the alternator to • Do not touch with wet hands. enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge recharge the vehicle's battery. • Close the lid when not in use and while sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or • Power outlets are designed for accessory driving the vehicle. prevent the engine from starting. plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces- • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., sory or accessory bracket from the plug. an electric shock and failure. coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will Improper use of the power outlet can cause degrade the battery even more quickly. damage. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

53 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...... 56 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 58 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .66 Location And Controls ...... 56 Red Warning Lights ...... 58 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Engine Oil Life Reset ...... 57 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 61 Cybersecurity ...... 67 Yellow Indicator Lights...... 64 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Green Indicator Lights ...... 64 PROGRAMS ...... 67 White Indicator Lights ...... 65 Blue Indicator Lights...... 66

55 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY This system conveniently allows the driver to The system allows the driver to select informa- select a variety of useful information by pushing tion by pushing the following buttons mounted Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru- the arrow buttons located on the left side of the on the steering wheel: ment cluster display, which offers useful infor- steering wheel. The instrument cluster display mation to the driver. With the ignition in the menu items consist of the following: STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will • Speedometer activate the display for viewing, and display the • Vehicle Info total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display • Performance important information about your vehicle’s sys- • Driver Assist — If Equipped tems and features. Using a driver interactive • Fuel Economy display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how • Trip systems are working and give you warnings • Audio when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted • Messages controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can access the spe- • Screen Setup cific information you want and make selections • Speed Warning Instrument Cluster Display Controls and adjustments. • Diagnostics Up And Down Arrow Buttons: Location And Controls Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle through the Main Menu Items. The instrument cluster display features an interactive display which is located in the instru- Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title ment cluster. area. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

56 Left And Right Arrow Buttons: • Within each submenu layer, the up and down Unless reset, this message will continue to dis- arrows will allow the user to select the item of play each time you place the ignition in the Using the left or right arrow button allows you to interest. ON/RUN position. To turn off the message tem- cycle through the submenu items of the Main porarily, push and release the OK or arrow but- menu item. • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a confirmation screen will appear (return- tons. To reset the oil change indicator system NOTE: ing the user to the first page of the submenu). (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. • Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button • Pushing the left arrow button will exit each will loop the user through the currently se- submenu layer and return to the main menu. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — lected menu or options presented on the Ignition screen. For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Performance Timers): Use the steering wheel instrument cluster dis- • Main menu and submenus wrap for continu- play controls for the following procedure(s): ous scrolling. • Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button. 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the • Upon returning to a main menu, the last ENGINE START/STOP button and place the submenu screen viewed within that main Engine Oil Life Reset ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start menu will be displayed. Oil Change Required the engine). OK Button: Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil 2. Push and release the down arrow button to For Digital Speedometer: change indicator system. The “Oil Change Re- scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” • Pushing the OK button changes units (mph quired” message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single or km/h). 3. Push and release the right arrow button to chime has sounded, to indicate the next sched- access the ”Oil Life” screen. For Screen Setup: uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. • OK button allows user to enter menu and means the engine oil change interval may fluc- If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric submenus. tuate, dependent upon your personal driving display will update to show 100%. If condi- style. tions are not met a popup message of "To 57 reset oil life engine must be off with ignition NOTE: — Brake Warning Light in run" will be displayed (for five seconds), If the indicator message illuminates when you This light monitors various brake functions, in- and the user will remain at the Oil Life start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys- cluding brake fluid level and parking brake screen. tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. application. If the brake light turns on it may 5. Push and release the up or down arrow but- indicate that the parking brake is applied, that ton to exit the submenu screen. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser- NOTE: voir. If the indicator message illuminates when you Red Warning Lights start the vehicle, the oil change indicator sys- — Air Bag Warning Light If the light remains on when the parking brake tem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at procedure. This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the indicates a possible brake hydraulic system Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. If the light malfunction or that a problem with the Brake is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock on while driving, have the system inspected at ENGINE START/STOP button and place the Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Con- ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a trol (ESC) system. In this case, the light will the engine). fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been remain on until the condition has been cor- 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. rected. If the problem is related to the brake three times within ten seconds. If the light comes on intermittently or remains booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the on while driving, have your authorized dealer felt during each stop. ENGINE START/STOP button once to return service the vehicle immediately. the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. The dual brake system provides a reserve brak-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ing capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake 58 Warning Light, which will turn on when the an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will This indicates a possible problem with the elec- brake fluid level in the master cylinder has turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate trical system or a related component. dropped below a specified level. repair to the ABS system is required. — Door Open Warning Light The light will remain on until the cause is Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be This indicator will illuminate when a door is corrected. checked by turning the ignition switch from the ajar/open and not fully closed. OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light NOTE: should illuminate for approximately two sec- NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp onds. The light should then turn off unless the If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level parking brake is applied or a brake fault is single chime. conditions. The vehicle should have service per- detected. If the light does not illuminate, have formed, and the brake fluid level checked. — Electric Power Steering Fail the light inspected by your authorized dealer. Warning Light If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is The light also will turn on when the parking necessary. This light will turn on when there's a fault with brake is applied with the ignition switch in the the EPS (Electric Power Steering) ON/RUN position. WARNING! This light will turn on when there's a fault with the NOTE: EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to “Power Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is This light shows only that the parking brake is Steering” in “Starting And Operating” in the dangerous. Part of the brake system may applied. It does not show the degree of brake Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/ have failed. It will take longer to stop the application. en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) vehicle checked immediately. — Battery Charge Warning Light for further information. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake This light illuminates when the battery is not System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic charging properly. If it stays on while the engine Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 59 — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) — Engine Temperature Warning Light — Oil Temperature Warning Light Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi- This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is This light informs you of a problem with the tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a high, this indicator will illuminate and a single vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as problem is detected while the vehicle is run- chime will sound. If the temperature reaches possible. ning, the light will either stay on or flash de- the upper limit, a continuous chime will be — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the sound for four minutes or until the engine is ignition when the vehicle is safely and com- allowed to cool whichever comes first. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN pletely stopped and the transmission is placed or ACC/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat If the light turns on while driving, safely pull in the PARK position. The light should turn off. belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is If the light remains on with the vehicle running, light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tempera- see an authorized dealer for service as soon as the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or re- ture reading does not return to normal, turn the possible. main on continuously and a chime will sound. engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case “Safety” for further information. running, immediate service is required and you Of Emergency” for further information. may experience reduced performance, an — Transmission Temperature Warning — Oil Pressure Warning Light elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your Light — If Equipped vehicle may require towing. The light will come This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If This light indicates that there is excessive trans- on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle mission fluid temperature that might occur with ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light a bulb check. If the light does not come on chime will sound when this light turns on. during starting, have the system checked by an turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at authorized dealer. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL corrected. This light does not indicate how PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level Once the light turns off, you may continue to must be checked under the hood. drive normally. 60 WARNING! Yellow Warning Lights WARNING! — Engine Check/Malfunction If you continue operating the vehicle when A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as ref- the Transmission Temperature Warning Light Indicator Warning Light (MIL) erenced above, can reach higher tempera- is illuminated you could cause the fluid to The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light tures than in normal operating conditions. boil over, come in contact with hot engine or (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or exhaust components and cause a fire. called OBD II that monitors engine and auto- park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could re- matic transmission control systems. The light sult in death or serious injury to the driver, will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/ CAUTION! occupants or others. RUN position before engine start. If the bulb Continuous driving with the Transmission does not come on when turning the key from Temperature Warning Light illuminated will OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked CAUTION! eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. promptly. Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indi- Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing cator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the vehicle control system. It also could af- — Trunk Open Warning Light the light after engine start. The vehicle should fect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter dam- be serviced if the light stays on through several This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is age and power loss will soon occur. Immedi- typical driving styles. In most situations, the open and not fully closed. ate service is required. vehicle will drive normally and will not require — Vehicle Security Warning Light — towing. If Equipped When the engine is running, the MIL may flash — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- to alert serious conditions that could lead to Warning Light — If Equipped mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security immediate loss of power or severe catalytic The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until converter damage. The vehicle should be ser- cluster will come on when the ignition is placed the vehicle is disarmed. viced as soon as possible if this occurs. in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and 61 when ESC is activated. It should go out with the Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or CAUTION! engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even comes on continuously with the engine running, if it was turned off previously. Do not continue driving with one or more flat a malfunction has been detected in the ESC tires as handling may be compromised. Stop The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the system. If this light remains on after several the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full OFF ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair in Drive Modes. several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater immediately using the dedicated tire repair than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — kit and contact your authorized dealer as dealer as soon as possible to have the problem If Equipped soon as possible. diagnosed and corrected. This indicator will illuminate when the wind- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC shield washer fluid is low. should be checked monthly when cold and Indicator Light” come on momentarily each inflated to the inflation pressure recommended time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or — Tire Pressure Monitoring System by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ACC/ON/RUN position. (TPMS) Warning Light ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your ve- • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking The warning light switches on and a message is hicle has tires of a different size than the size sounds when it is active. This is normal; the displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. lower than the recommended value and/or that pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) • This light will come on when the vehicle is in slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, an ESC event. optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may As an added safety feature, your vehicle has not be guaranteed. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- Warning Light — If Equipped Should one or more tires be in the condition men- tioned above, the display will show the indications sure telltale when one or more of your tires is This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- corresponding to each tire in sequence. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when GETTING TO KNOW YOURtrol INSTRUMENT PANEL (ESC) is off. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- 62 sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning — Low Fuel Warning Light tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel telltale after replacing one or more tires or (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re- sound. The light will remain on until fuel is vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. placement or alternate tires and wheels allow added. the TPMS to continue to function properly. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, CAUTION! Light even if under-inflation has not reached the level The TPMS has been optimized for the original This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is pressure telltale. and warning have been established for the tire placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable Your vehicle has also been equipped with a and may stay on for as long as four seconds. system operation or sensor damage may result TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when when using replacement equipment that is not If the ABS light remains on or turns on while the system is not operating properly. The TPMS of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermar- driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake malfunction indicator is combined with the low ket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using system is not functioning and service is re- tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire quired. However, the conventional brake system malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to will continue to operate normally if the brake mately one minute and then remain continu- become inoperable. After using an aftermarket warning light is not on. ously illuminated. This sequence will continue tire sealant it is recommended that you take If the ABS light is on, the brake system should upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the malfunction exists. When the malfunction your sensor function checked. be serviced as soon as possible to restore the indicator is illuminated, the system may not be benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light able to detect or signal low tire pressure as does not turn on when the ignition is placed in intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the variety of reasons, including the installation of light inspected by an authorized dealer. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the 63 — Forward Collision Warning Light — • When the LaneSense system senses the lane Yellow Indicator Lights If Equipped has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the LaneSense indicator — Forward Collision Warning Off This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the changes from solid white/green to flashing Indicator Light — If Equipped Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your yellow. This light indicates that Forward Collision Warn- local authorized dealer for service. Refer to ing is off. "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in "Safety" • Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped" in “Start- ing And Operating” for further information. for further information. Green Indicator Lights — LaneSense Failure Warning Light — — Service AWD Warning Light — — ECO Mode Indicator Light If Equipped If Equipped This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active. This light will turn on when the LaneSense This telltale will turn on to indicate the All system is not operating and needs service. — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning Please see your authorized dealer. With Target Light — If Equipped properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealer. — Service Adaptive Cruise Control This will display when the ACC is set and a Warning Light — If Equipped target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive — LaneSense Warning Light — Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat- This light will turn on when a ACC is not oper- If Equipped ing” for further information. ating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive The LaneSense system provides the driver with Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operat- — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set visual and steering torque warnings when the ing” for further information. Without Target Light — If Equipped vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintention- — Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light ally without the use of a turn signal. This will display the distance setting for the ACC — If Equipped system when the system is engaged. Refer to • When the LaneSense system senses a lane “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap drift situation, the LaneSense indicator And Operating” for further information. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL changes from solid green to solid yellow. is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer. 64 — Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — Sport Mode Indicator Light — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the speed control is This light will turn on when Sport Mode is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Con- active. This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but is not set. trol” in “Starting And Operating” for further — Turn Signal Indicator Lights information. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in “Starting The turn signal arrows will flash independently And Operating” for further information. — Front Fog Indicator Light — when left or right turn signals are selected. Turn — Cruise Control ON Indicator If Equipped signals can be activated when the multifunction This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lever is moved down (left) or up (right). This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set. lights are on. NOTE: — LaneSense Indicator Light — • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped If Equipped driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. When the LaneSense system is ON, but not The LaneSense indicator is solid green when • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if armed, the LaneSense indicator is solid white. both lane markings have been detected and the either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This occurs when only left, right, or neither line system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in has been detected. If a single lane line is de- the instrument cluster and a torque warning in White Indicator Lights tected, and the system is ready to provide only the steering wheel if an unintentional lane de- — Custom Mode Indicator Light visual warnings if an unintentional lane depar- parture occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If ture occurs on detected lane line. Refer to Equipped" in “Starting And Operating” for fur- This light will turn on when Custom Mode is “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And ther information. active. Operating” for further information. — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for further information. This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

65 — Sport Mode Indicator Light When the set speed is exceeded by 2 mph ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up This light will turn on when Sport Mode is yellow and flash along with a continuous chime OBD II active. (up to 10 seconds or until the speed is no longer Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur- exceeded). Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This ther information. NOTE: system monitors the performance of the emis- — Track Mode Indicator Light The number “31” is only an example of a speed sions, engine, and transmission control sys- that can be select. tems. When these systems are operating prop- This light will turn on when Track Mode is erly, your vehicle will provide excellent active. Blue Indicator Lights performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur- — High Beam Indicator Light ther information. regulations. This indicator shows that the high beam head- — Valet Mode Indicator Light If any of these systems require service, the OBD lights are on. With the low beams activated, II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator This light will turn on when Valet Mode is active. push the multifunction lever forward (toward Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high and other information to assist your service Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for fur- beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward ther information. technician in making repairs. Although your (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the vehicle will usually be drivable and not need — Passive Speed Limiter Engaged high beams. Pull the lever toward you for a towing, see your authorized dealer for service as temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" sce- soon as possible. The indication light up white along with a noti- nario. fication text message (speed warning set to xx followed by unit). When the set speed is just exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

66 CAUTION! WARNING! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could • ONLY an authorized service technician cause further damage to the emission con- should connect equipment to the OBD II In some localities, it may be a legal requirement trol system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to diagnose or to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions economy and driveability. The vehicle service your vehicle. control system. Failure to pass could prevent must be serviced before any emissions • If unauthorized equipment is connected to vehicle registration. tests can be performed. the OBD II connection port, such as a For states that require an Inspection • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: and Maintenance (I/M), this check running, severe catalytic converter damage • Be possible that vehicle systems, in- verifies the “Malfunction Indicator and power loss will soon occur. Immediate cluding safety related systems, could Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not service is required. be impaired or a loss of vehicle control on when the engine is running, and that the could occur that may result in an ac- OBD II system is ready for testing. Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) cident involving serious injury or Cybersecurity death. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The • Access, or allow others to access, in- OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard formation stored in your vehicle sys- was recently serviced, recently had a dead bat- Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection tems, including personal information. tery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II port to allow access to information related to the system should be determined not ready for the performance of your emissions controls. Autho- For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. rized service technicians may need to access in “Multimedia”. this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

67 Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II which you can use prior to going to the test things will happen: system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and during normal vehicle operation you should is ready, you must do the following: then return to being fully illuminated until you have your vehicle serviced before going to the 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle but do not crank or start the engine. means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not because the MIL is on with the engine running. ready and you should not proceed to the I/M NOTE: station. If you crank or start the engine, you will have • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain to start this test over. fully illuminated until you place the ignition in 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the off position or start the engine. This means the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc- that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on you can proceed to the I/M station. as part of a normal bulb check. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

68 SAFETY

SAFETY AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...... 70 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...... 77 SAFETY TIPS ...... 105 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 70 Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . .77 Transporting Passengers ...... 105 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) ...... 71 Important Safety Precautions ...... 77 Exhaust Gas ...... 106 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .72 Seat Belt Systems ...... 78 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . .84 The Vehicle ...... 106 Child Restraints...... 93 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Transporting Pets ...... 105 Make Outside The Vehicle ...... 108

69 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a Blind Spot Monitoring blind spot zone.

SAFETY The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/ front/side of the vehicle.

The BSM detection zone covers approximately Rear Detection Zones one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning rear view mirror and extends approximately light will momentarily illuminate in both outside Blind Spot Mirror 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec- system is operational. The BSM system sensors The BSM system can also be configured to tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when radio to notify you of objects that have entered (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of the vehicle is in PARK. the detection zones. vehicles in these areas.

70 General Information Forward Collision Warning (FCW) NOTE: The following regulatory statement applies to all The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system • The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this provides the driver with audible warnings and the system to warn you of a possible collision vehicle: visual warnings within the instrument cluster with the vehicle in front of you. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC display, to warn the driver when it detects a • Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt potential frontal collision. The warnings are in- system from warning you of a possible colli- RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the tended to provide the driver with enough time to sion with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is following two conditions: react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. set to off, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. 1. This device may not cause harmful NOTE: interference. FCW monitors the information from the forward Changing FCW Status 2. This device must accept any interference looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake The FCW feature has two settings and can be received, including interference that may Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of changed within the Uconnect System Screen: cause undesired operation. a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the • Far NOTE: driver will be provided with audible and visual • Near Changes or modifications not expressly ap- warnings. proved by the party responsible for compliance Far could void the user’s authority to operate the Turning FCW On Or Off equipment. The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting. The forward collision button is located in the The far setting provides warnings for potential Uconnect display in the controls settings. When collisions more distant in front of the vehicle, FCW is selected "off", there will be an "FCW allowing the driver to have the most reaction OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster time to avoid a collision. display. More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting. 71 NOTE: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire This setting gives you the most reaction time. pressure if the tire pressure falls below the The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will low-pressure warning limit for any reason, in- Near warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on cluding low temperature effects and natural SAFETY the vehicle recommended cold placard pres- Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, pressure loss through the tire. allows the system to warn you of a potential sure. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low frontal collision when you are much closer. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This This setting provides less reaction time than the will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or means that when the outside temperature de- “Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic above the recommended cold placard pressure. driving experience. creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pres- pressure should always be set based on cold More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to sure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumi- inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting. nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the pressure after the vehicle has not been driven recommended cold placard pressure in order for Refer to your Owner’s Manual at for at least three hours, or driven less than the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The will automatically update and the TPM Telltale (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the Light will turn off once the system receives the (Canadian Residents) for further details. maximum inflation pressure molded into the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And WARNING! be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph Maintenance” for information on how to prop- (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not in- erly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure information. tended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is FCW detect every type of potential collision. normal and there should be no adjustment for NOTE: The driver has the responsibility to avoid a this increased pressure. When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may collision by controlling the vehicle via brak- need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi ing and steering. Failure to follow this warn- (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard ing could lead to serious injury or death. pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni- toring Telltale Light off. 72 For example, your vehicle may have a recom- CAUTION! • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire mended cold (parked for more than three hours) causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the aftermarket wheels and may contribute to failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the a poor overall system performance or sen- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a sor damage. Customers are encouraged to vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire feature operation. the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibil- (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ity to maintain correct tire pressure using an enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driv- accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under- ing the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af- ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is inflation has not reached the level to trigger rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situ- recommended that you take your vehicle to ation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only your authorized dealer to have your sensor • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s rec- function checked. pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the ac- ommended cold placard pressure value. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- tual tire pressure in the tire. sure always reinstall the valve stem cap. Premium System CAUTION! This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could dam- The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses age the TPMS sensor. • The TPMS has been optimized for the wireless technology with wheel rim mounted original equipment tires and wheels. electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- NOTE: TPMS pressures and warning have been els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of established for the tire size equipped on • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- tire care and maintenance or to provide warn- to the receiver module. tion or sensor damage may result when ing of a tire failure or condition. using replacement equipment that is not NOTE: • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres- of the same size, type, and/or style. The It is particularly important for you to check the sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. TPM sensor is not designed for use on tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. 73 The TPMS consists of the following components: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to • Receiver module 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. • Four tire pressure monitoring sensors

SAFETY NOTE: • Various tire pressure monitoring system mes- When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may sages, which display in the instrument cluster need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi • Tire pressure monitoring telltale light (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni- toring Telltale Light off. Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when Tire Pressure Monitor Display tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument Should this occur, you should stop as soon as cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” message possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure and a graphic showing the pressure values of condition (those shown in a different color in each tire with the low tire pressure values shown the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s in a different color. recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display change color back to the original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. 74 Service TPMS Warning • Accumulation of snow or ice around the the instrument cluster will display a “Service wheels or wheel housings. Tire Pressure System” message for five sec- If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale onds and then display dashes (- -) in place of • Using tire chains on the vehicle. Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and the pressure value. then remain on solid. The system fault will also • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a sound a chime. In addition, the instrument sensors. cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” Vehicles With Compact Spare will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then message for a minimum of five seconds and remain on solid, and the instrument cluster then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” value to indicate which sensor is not being size does not have a tire pressure monitoring message for five seconds and then display received. sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. the pressure in the compact spare tire. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence 5. Once you repair or replace the original road will repeat, providing the system fault still ex- 2. If you install the compact or non-matching tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of ists. If the system fault no longer exists, the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that the compact spare or non-matching full size, TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- the TPMS will update automatically. In ad- "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no lon- ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, dition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off ger display, and a pressure value will display in the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and and the graphic in the instrument cluster will place of the dashes. A system fault can occur a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic display a new pressure value instead of due to any of the following: in the instrument cluster will still display a dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is different color pressure value and an "Inflate below the low-pressure warning limit in any • Signal interference due to electronic devices to XX" message. of the four active road tires. The vehicle may or driving next to facilities emitting the same need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Tell- • Installing aftermarket window tinting that receive this information. contains materials that may block radio wave tale Light” will flash on and off for 75 sec- signals. onds and then remain on solid. In addition,

75 TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel General Information and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all The following regulatory statement applies to all equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

SAFETY wheel and tire assemblies that do not have vehicle: (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 sec- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. onds and then turn off. The instrument cluster Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes- RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires sage and then display pressure values in place following two conditions: not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no lon- ence, and 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The ger be displayed as long as no system fault TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will exists. (2) This device must accept any interference flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain received, including interference that may cause on. The instrument cluster will display the undesired operation. “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then NOTE: display dashes (--) in place of the pressure Changes or modifications not expressly ap- values. proved by the party responsible for compliance Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the could void the user’s authority to operate the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SER- equipment. VICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

76 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Here are some simple steps you can take to 6. All occupants should always wear their lap minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air and shoulder belts properly. Some of the most important safety features in bag: 7. The driver and front passenger seats should your vehicle are the restraint systems: 1. Children 12 years old and under should be moved back as far as practical to allow Occupant Restraint Systems Features always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a the front air bags room to inflate. rear seat. • Seat Belt Systems 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) vehicle has side air bags, and deployment rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the Air Bags occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully front passenger seat, move the seat as far into the space between occupants and the • Child Restraints back as possible and use the proper child door and occupants could be injured. Some of the safety features described in this restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be section may be standard equipment on some section for further information). modified to accommodate a disabled person, models, or may be optional equipment on oth- 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for ers. If you are not sure, ask your authorized vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child dealer. Restraints” in this section for further infor- customer service contact information. mation) should be secured in a vehicle with a Important Safety Precautions rear seat in child restraints or belt- WARNING! positioning booster seats. Older children Please pay close attention to the information in • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in who do not use child restraints or belt- this section. It tells you how to use your restraint front of an air bag. A deploying passenger positioning booster seats should ride prop- system properly, to keep you and your passen- front air bag can cause death or serious erly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. gers as safe as possible. injury to a child 12 years or younger, in- 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder cluding a child in a rear-facing child re- belt behind them or under their arm. straint. 5. You should read the instructions provided • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a with your child restraint to make sure that vehicle with a rear seat. you are using it properly. 77 Seat Belt Systems Initial Indication will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat Buckle up even though you are an excellent If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition based on vehicle speed until the driver and driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

SAFETY may be a poor driver and could cause a collision a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all that includes you. This can happen far away driver or outboard front seat passenger (if occupants to buckle their seat belts. from home or on your own street. equipped with outboard front passenger seat Research has shown that seat belts save lives, BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch Change of Status is first in the START or ON/RUN position the and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and rein a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen equipped with outboard front passenger seat main on until both outboard front seat belts are when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the buckled. The outboard front passenger seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning se- BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the quence will begin until the seat belts are buck- vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be passenger seat is unoccupied. led again. belted at all times. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated not active when the outboard front passenger (BeltAlert) when the vehicle is moving above a specified seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard when an animal or other items are placed on the front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped outboard front passenger seat or when the seat BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended driver and outboard front seat passenger (if (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat not active when the outboard front passenger equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning se- are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly Alert feature is active whenever the ignition quence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Re- switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. minder Light and sounding an intermittent stowed. chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light 78 BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by WARNING! WARNING! your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not also provided at their seating position to recommend deactivating BeltAlert. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to minimize the risk of severe injury or death more severe injuries in a collision. The air NOTE: in the event of a crash. bags work with your seat belt to restrain If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could you properly. In some collisions, the air or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped make your injuries in a collision much bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or seat belt even though you have air bags. you could even slide out of the seat belt. unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will • In a collision, you and your passengers can Follow these instructions to wear your seat turn on and remain on until the driver and suffer much greater injuries if you are not belt safely and to keep your passengers outboard front seat passenger seat belts are properly buckled up. You can strike the safe, too. buckled. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, • Two people should never be belted into a or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Lap/Shoulder Belts single seat belt. People belted together Always be sure you and others in your can crash into one another in a collision, All seating positions in your vehicle are vehicle are buckled up properly. hurting one another badly. Never use a equipped with lap/shoulder belts. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only one person, no matter what their size. people riding in these areas are more likely during very sudden stops or collisions. This to be seriously injured or killed. feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt • Do not allow people to ride in any area of WARNING! to move freely with you under normal condi- your vehicle that is not equipped with seats tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will and seat belts. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic including the driver, should always wear bones, but across your abdomen. Always their seat belts whether or not an air bag is wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

79 WARNING! WARNING! 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the • A twisted seat belt may not protect you der so that your strongest bones will take rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear properly. In a collision, it could even cut the force in a collision. seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the SAFETY into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the web- protect you from injury during a collision. against your body, without twists. If you bing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, You are more likely to hit your head in a to go around your lap. take it to your authorized dealer immedi- collision if you do not wear your shoulder ately and have it fixed. belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong to be used together. buckle will not protect you properly. The • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in lap portion could ride too high on your a collision and leave you with no protec- body, possibly causing internal injuries. tion. Inspect the seat belt system periodi- Always buckle your seat belt into the cally, checking for cuts, frays, or loose buckle nearest you. parts. Damaged parts must be replaced • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect immediately. Do not disassemble or you properly. In a sudden stop, you could modify the seat belt system. Seat belt move too far forward, increasing the possi- assemblies must be replaced after a colli- bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. sion. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the in- Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions side surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit Pulling Out The Latch Plate increasing head and neck injury. A seat back and adjust the seat. belt worn under the arm can cause internal 1 — Seat Belt Buckle injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder 2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoul-

80 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure insert the latch plate into the buckle until Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted you hear a “click.” lap/shoulder belt. 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull to the anchor point. up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a begins immediately above the latch plate. collision. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoul- webbing. The folded webbing must enter the der and chest with minimal, if any slack so slot at the top of the latch plate. that it is comfortable and not resting on your Adjustable Anchorage neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it the shoulder belt. clears the folded webbing and the seat belt As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you is no longer twisted. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a on the buckle. The seat belt will automati- Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage lower position, and if you are taller than average, cally retract to its stowed position. If neces- you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing In the driver and front passenger seats, the top higher position. After you release the anchorage to allow the seat belt to retract fully. of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or button, try to move it up or down to make sure downward to position the seat belt away from that it is locked in position. your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

81 NOTE: Seat Belt Extender WARNING! The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature long enough and only use in the recom- even when the webbing is fully extended and allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be ad- mended seating positions. Remove and

SAFETY the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if justed in the upward position without pushing store the Seat Belt Extender when not equipped) is in its lowest position, your autho- or squeezing the release button. To verify the needed. rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down- Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is used only if the existing seat belt is not long locked into position. enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not WARNING! required for a different occupant, it must be removed. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much WARNING! worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is Follow these instructions to wear your seat physically required in order to properly fit belt safely and to keep your passengers the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE safe, too. the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the • Position the shoulder belt across the distance between the front edge of the Pregnant Women And Seat Belts shoulder and chest with minimal, if any Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than slack so that it is comfortable and not Seat belts must be worn by all occupants in- 6 inches. resting on your neck. The retractor will cluding pregnant women: the risk of injury in • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. the event of an accident is reduced for the needed can increase the risk of serious • Misadjustment of the seat belt could re- mother and the unborn child if they are wearing injury or death in a collision. Only use the duce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a seat belt. a crash. Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not

82 Position the lap belt snug and low below the Energy Management Feature abdomen and across the strong bones of the The front seat belt system is equipped with an hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoul- Energy Management feature that may help fur- der belt behind the back or under the arm. ther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor Seat Belt Pretensioner assembly that is designed to release webbing in The front seat belt system is equipped with a controlled manner. pretensioning devices that are designed to re- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking move slack from the seat belt in the event of a (ALR) Retractor collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- If the passenger seating position is equipped the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, work for all size occupants, including those in Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to child restraints. a child restraint system. For additional informa- comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid- section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR NOTE: tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as These devices are not a substitute for proper The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Re- the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat straints” section of this manual. The figure retract completely in this case and then care- belt still must be worn snugly and positioned below illustrates the locking feature for each fully pull out only the amount of webbing nec- properly. seating position. essary to comfortably wrap around the occu- The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, buckle until you hear a "click." the pretensioners are single use items. A de- In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is ployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still be replaced immediately. retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.

83 Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) child restraint is installed in a seating position Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Some of the safety features described in this that has a seat belt with this feature. Children and allow it to retract completely to disengage section may be standard equipment on some 12 years old and under should always be prop- SAFETY the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the models, or may be optional equipment on oth- erly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. ers. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. WARNING! WARNING! The air bag system must be ready to protect you • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the switchable Automatic Locking Retrac- (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter- front air bag can cause death or serious tor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt connecting wiring associated with the electrical injury to a child 12 years or younger, in- function is not working properly when Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may cluding a child in a rear-facing child re- checked according to the procedures in be equipped with the following Air Bag System straint. the Service Manual. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Components: • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly vehicle with a rear seat. could increase the risk of injury in colli- Air Bag System Components How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode sions. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder restrain occupants who are wearing the • Air Bag Warning Light belt. seat belt or children who are using booster • Steering Wheel and Column seats. The locked mode is only used to 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- • Instrument Panel ward until the entire seat belt is extracted. install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restrain- • Knee Impact Bolsters 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt ing the child. • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Auto- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch matic Locking Mode. • Supplemental Side Air Bags 84 • Supplemental Knee Air Bags Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: • Front and Side Impact Sensors single chime will sound to alert you if the light If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine comes on again after initial startup. related gauges are not working, the Occupant • Seat Belt Pretensioners Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be dis- The ORC also includes diagnostics that will • Seat Track Position Sensors abled. In this condition the air bags may not be illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warn- ready to inflate for your protection. Have an Air Bag Warning Light ing Light if a malfunction is detected that could authorized dealer service the air bag system affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also immediately. The ORC monitors the readiness of the record the nature of the malfunction. While the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever air bag system is designed to be maintenance the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN free, if any of the following occurs, have an WARNING! position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF authorized dealer service the air bag system Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your position or in the ACC position, the air bag immediately. instrument panel could mean you won’t have system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on the air bag system to protect you in a colli- The ORC contains a backup power supply sys- during the four to eight seconds when the sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, tem that may deploy the air bag system even if ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. the battery loses power or it becomes discon- stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after nected prior to deployment. comes on as you drive, have an authorized the four to eight-second interval. dealer service the air bag system immedi- The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- ately. the instrument panel for approximately four to tently or remains on while driving. eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition Redundant Air Bag Warning Light switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn detected, which could affect the Supplemental off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 85 will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, WARNING! a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on cluding death. Air bags need room to in- and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant flate. Sit back, comfortably extending your SAFETY Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently arms to reach the steering wheel or instru- or remains on while driving have an authorized ment panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in dealer service the vehicle immediately. For ad- front of an air bag. A deploying passenger ditional information regarding the Redundant front air bag can cause death or serious Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know injury to a child 12 years or younger, in- Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual. cluding a child in a rear-facing child re- Front Air Bags straint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder vehicle with a rear seat. belts for both the driver and front passenger. Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations The front air bags are a supplement to the seat Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags Features mounted in the center of the steering wheel. 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster The passenger front air bag is mounted in the 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/ The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi- instrument panel, above the glove compart- Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag stage driver and front passenger air bags. This ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” system provides output appropriate to the sever- are embossed on the air bag covers. ity and type of collision as determined by the WARNING! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • Being too close to the steering wheel or sensors (if equipped) or other system compo- instrument panel during front air bag de- nents. ployment could cause serious injury, in-

86 The first stage inflator is triggered immediately WARNING! On the other hand, depending on the type and during an impact that requires air bag deploy- location of impact, front air bags may deploy in ment. A low energy output is used in less severe ally. You may damage the air bags and you crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but collisions. A higher energy output is used for could be injured because the air bags may that produce a severe initial deceleration. more severe collisions. no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are de- Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel- This vehicle may be equipped with a driver signed to open only when the air bags are eration over time, vehicle speed and damage by and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch inflating. themselves are not good indicators of whether or that detects whether the driver or front passen- • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to not an air bag should have deployed. ger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle more severe injuries in a collision. The air Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad- bags work with your seat belt to restrain collisions, and also are needed to help keep you vanced Front Air Bags. you properly. In some collisions, air bags in position, away from an inflating air bag. won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or belts even though you have air bags. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front passenger seat track position sensors that front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bag Operation large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to Front Air Bags based upon seat position. inflate the front air bags. Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper WARNING! tional protection by supplementing the seat right side of the instrument panel separate and belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their • No objects should be placed over or near the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli- the air bag on the instrument panel or full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all steering wheel because any such objects time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front frontal collisions, including some that may pro- could cause harm if the vehicle is in a air bags then quickly deflate while helping to duce substantial vehicle damage — for ex- collision severe enough to cause the air restrain the driver and front passenger. ample, some pole collisions, truck underrides, bag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air and angle offset collisions. bag covers or attempt to open them manu-

87 Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs)

SAFETY position the front occupants for improved inter- action with the front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS impact bolsters in any way. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the • Do not mount any accessories to the knee outboard side of the seats. impact bolsters such as alarm lights, ste- reos, citizen band radios, etc. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in ad- Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag dition to the injury reduction potential provided Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental by the seat belts and body structure. Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on panel below the steering column. The Supple- the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. mental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced The inflating SAB deploys through the seat protection during a frontal impact by working seam into the space between the occupant and together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed front air bags. and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. 88 WARNING! belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Do not use accessory seat covers or place Children are at an even greater risk of injury objects between you and the Side Air Bags; from a deploying air bag. the performance could be adversely affected The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial and/or objects could be pushed into you, or complete ejection of vehicle occupants causing serious injury. through side windows in certain side impact Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains events. (SABICs) WARNING! This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). • Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains deployment of the SABICs. The trim cov- (SABICs) are located above the side windows. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable ering above the side windows where the The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABIC and its deployment path are located AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and should remain free from any obstructions. other injuries to front and rear seat outboard • In order for the SABICs to work as in- occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to tended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. the injury reduction potential provided by the Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your seat belts and body structure. vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side permanent attachments (bolts or screws) windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the out- for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not side edge of the headliner out of the way and drill into the roof of the vehicle for any covers the window. The SABICs inflate with reason. enough force to injure occupants if they are not 89 Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt WARNING! restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in time than it takes to blink your eyes. certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit up- SAFETY Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular WARNING! right in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during impact event is appropriate, based on the sever- • Occupants, including children, who are up deployment could cause you to be severely ity and type of collision. The side impact sen- against or very close to Side Air Bags can injured or killed. sors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could response to impact events. The system is cali- including children, should never lean on or lead to more severe injuries in a collision. brated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact sleep against the door, side windows, or The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt side of the vehicle during impacts that require area where the side air bags inflate, even if to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side im- they are in an infant or child restraint. Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always pacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; • Seat belts (and child restraints where ap- wear your seat belt even though you have a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags propriate) are necessary for your protection Side Air Bags. only and a right-side impact deploys the right in all collisions. They also help keep you in Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is position, away from an inflating Side Air NOTE: not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their trim, but they will open during air bag deploy- seat belts properly and sit upright with ment. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side their backs against the seats. Children collisions, including some collisions at certain must be properly restrained in a child re- angles, or some side collisions that do not im- straint or booster seat that is appropriate pact the area of the passenger compartment. for the size of the child. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

90 Rollover Events Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain NOTE: The front air bags are designed to deflate imme- rollover events. The ORC determines whether The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- diately after deployment. the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a par- tors the internal circuits and interconnecting NOTE: ticular rollover event is appropriate, based on wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all Components listed below: the severity and type of collision. Vehicle dam- collisions. This does not mean something is age by itself is not a good indicator of whether or • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) wrong with the air bag system. not Side Air Bags should have deployed. • Air Bag Warning Light If you do have a collision which deploys the air The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover • Steering Wheel and Column bags, any or all of the following may occur: events. The rollover sensing system determines • The air bag material may sometimes cause if a rollover event may be in progress and • Instrument Panel abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- whether deployment is appropriate. In the event • Knee Impact Bolsters pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The the vehicle experiences a rollover or near roll- • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or over event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags • Seat Belt Buckle Switch those you might get sliding along a carpet or is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will gymnasium floor. They are not caused by con- also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both • Supplemental Side Air Bags tact with chemicals. They are not permanent sides of the vehicle. • Supplemental Knee Air Bags and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial • Front and Side Impact Sensors or if you have any blistering, see your doctor or complete ejection of vehicle occupants • Seat Belt Pretensioners immediately. through side windows in certain rollover or side • Seat Track Position Sensors impact events. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye 91 irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For Enhanced Accident Response System compartment and on the ground near the en- nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If gine compartment and fuel tank before reset- In the event of an impact, if the communication the irritation continues, see your doctor. If ting the system and starting the engine. network remains intact, and the power remains these particles settle on your clothing, follow

SAFETY intact, depending on the nature of the event, the garment manufacturer’s instructions for Maintaining Your Air Bag System cleaning. the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform WARNING! Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have the following functions: deployed. If you are involved in another colli- • Modifications to any part of the air bag sion, the air bags will not be in place to protect • Cut off fuel to the engine. system could cause it to fail when you you. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has need it. You could be injured if the air bag power or until the hazard light button is system is not there to protect you. Do not WARNING! pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated modify the components or wiring, includ- by pressing the hazard light button. ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension- the steering wheel hub trim cover or the • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as ers cannot protect you in another collision. upper right side of the instrument panel. long as the battery has power. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle and the seat belt retractor assemblies re- • Unlock the power door locks. body structure, or add aftermarket side placed by an authorized dealer immediately. steps or running boards. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of System serviced as well. Procedure the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it NOTE: In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re- sponse System functions after an event, the has an air bag system. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the ignition switch must be changed from ignition • Do not attempt to modify any part of your interior trim, but they will open during air bag air bag system. The air bag may inflate START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully deployment. accidentally or may not function properly if check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine • After any collision, the vehicle should be modifications are made. Take your vehicle taken to an authorized dealer immediately. 92 The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- WARNING! such data as: ment is required, and access to the vehicle or to an authorized dealer for any air bag • How various systems in your vehicle were the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle system service. If your seat, including your operating; manufacturer, other parties, such as law en- trim cover and cushion, needs to be ser- forcement, that have the special equipment, viced in any way (including removal or • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety can read the information if they have access to loosening/tightening of seat attachment belts were buckled/fastened; the vehicle or the EDR. bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Child Restraints accessories may be used. If it is necessary • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up to modify the air bag system for persons at all times, including babies and children. with disabilities, contact your authorized These data can help provide a better under- Every state in the United States, and every dealer. standing of the circumstances in which crashes Canadian province, requires that small children and injuries occur. ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a Children 12 years or younger should ride prop- recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. to record, in certain crash or near crash-like recorded by the EDR under normal driving con- According to crash statistics, children are safer situations, such as an air bag deployment or ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gen- when properly restrained in the rear seats rather hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in der, age, and crash location) are recorded. How- than in the front. understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- ever, other parties, such as law enforcement, formed. The EDR is designed to record data could combine the EDR data with the type of related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems personally identifying data routinely acquired for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds during a crash investigation. or less.

93 WARNING! There are different sizes and types of restraints NOTE: for children from newborn size to the child • For additional information, refer to In a collision, an unrestrained child can be- almost large enough for an adult safety belt. www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm come a projectile inside the vehicle. The Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to or call: 1–888–327–4236 SAFETY force required to hold even an infant on your make sure you have the correct seat for your • Canadian residents should refer to Transport lap could become so great that you could not child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc- Canada’s website for additional information: hold the child, no matter how strong you are. tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ The child and others could be badly injured Manual and on all the labels attached to the or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle child restraint. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm should be in a proper restraint for the child’s Before buying any restraint system, make sure size. that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

94 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who have not Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, Infants and Toddlers reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, Small Children the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, Larger Children restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seated in the rear seat of the vehicle seat belt Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Child Restraints height or weight limit of their booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints than infant carriers do, so they can be used WARNING! rear-facing by children who have outgrown their Safety experts recommend that children ride infant carrier but are still less than at least two • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years years old. Children should remain rear-facing vehicle with a rear seat. old or until they reach either the height or weight until they reach the highest weight or height limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two Older Children And Child Restraints allowed by their convertible child seat. types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: Children who are two years old or who have out- infant carriers and convertible child seats. WARNING! grown their rear-facing convertible child seat can The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in vehicle. It is recommended for children from child seats and convertible child seats used in the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger birth until they reach the weight or height limit forward-facing direction are for children who are front air bag can cause death or serious injury of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can over two years old or who have outgrown the rear- to a child 12 years or younger, including a be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing child in a rear-facing child restraint. the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a convertible child seat. Children should remain in a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction 95 forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long WARNING! 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s as possible, up to the highest weight or height shoulder between their neck and arm? allowed by the child seat. seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,

SAFETY All children whose weight or height is above the • When your child restraint is not in use, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach? forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the whole trip? seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike If the answer to any of these questions was the child’s back is against the seatback, they the occupants or seatbacks and cause se- “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The rious personal injury. seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically the vehicle by the seat belt. Children Too Large For Booster Seats and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the WARNING! Children who are large enough to wear the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are the face or neck, move the child closer to the • Improper installation can lead to failure of long enough to bend over the front of the seat center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to an infant or child restraint. It could come when their back is against the seatback, should position the seat belt on the child correctly. loose in a collision. The child could be use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple badly injured or killed. Follow the child 5-step test to decide whether the child can use WARNING! restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly the vehicle’s seat belt alone: when installing an infant or child restraint. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt • After a child restraint is installed in the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat for- back of the vehicle seat? the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop- ward or rearward because it can loosen the 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over erly, which may result in serious injury or death. child restraint attachments. Remove the the front of the vehicle seat – while the child A child must always wear both the lap and child restraint before adjusting the vehicle is still sitting all the way back? shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

96 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether Lower Anchors Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg)

97 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren These anchorages are used to install LATCH- LATCH Positions For Installing Child (LATCH) Restraint System equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s Restraints In This Vehicle seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. SAFETY In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Label LATCH Positions For Installing Child Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint Restraints In This Vehicle anchorage system called LATCH, which stands Lower Anchorage Symbol for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position.

98 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system 65 lbs (29.5 kg) seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once to attach the child restraint? the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if restraint? allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated Can two child restraints be attached using a common No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child lower LATCH anchorage? seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the Yes if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See front passenger seat? your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.

99 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Forward-facing child restraints and some rear- facing child restraints will also be equipped The lower anchorages are round bars that There are tether strap anchorages behind with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it each rear seating position located in the panel hook at the end to attach to the top tether

SAFETY meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym- between the rear seatback and the rear window. anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it bols on the seatback. They are just visible when They are found under a plastic cover with the is attached to the anchorage. you lean into the rear seat to install the child tether anchorage symbol on it. restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your Center Seat LATCH finger along the gap between the seatback and If a child restraint installed in the center posi- seat cushion. tion blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Tether Strap Anchorages Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap LATCH Anchorage Locations Always follow the directions of the child re- on each side. Each will have a hook or connector straint manufacturer when installing your child to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be tighten the connection to the anchorage. installed as described here. 100 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, con- the child restraint, route the seat belt through Restraint nect it to the top tether anchorage. See the the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. section “Installing Child Restraints Using Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in If the selected seating position has a Switchable the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, attach a tether anchor. that they should not play with them. stow the seat belt, following the instructions 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child below. See the section “Installing Child Re- restraint rearward and downward into the WARNING! straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check seat. Remove slack in the straps according to what type of seat belt each seating position has. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. • Improper installation of a child restraint to 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure 6. Test that the child restraint is installed of the restraint. The child could be badly on the tether strap of the child seat so that tightly by pulling back and forth on the child you can more easily attach the hooks or injured or killed. Follow the child restraint seat at the belt path. It should not move more manufacturer’s directions exactly when in- connectors to the vehicle anchorages. than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. stalling an infant or child restraint. 2. Place the child seat between the lower an- How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR • Child restraint anchorages are designed to chorages for that seating position. For some (ALR) Seat Belt: withstand only those loads imposed by second row seats, you may need to recline correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no the seat and / or raise the head restraint to When using the LATCH attaching system to circumstances are they to be used for adult get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may that are not being used by other occupants or items or equipment to the vehicle. wish to move it to its rear-most position to being used to secure child restraints. An unused make room for the child seat. You may also belt could injure a child if they play with it and move the front seat forward to allow more accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH room for the child seat. system, buckle the seat belt behind the child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the buckled seat belt interferes with the child re- selected seating position. straint installation, instead of buckling it behind 101 Installing Child Restraints Using The The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Vehicle Seat Belt tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Child Restraints In This Vehicle Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to Child restraint systems are designed to be se- keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around SAFETY cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt the child restraint so that it is not necessary to portion of a lap/shoulder belt. use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of WARNING! the webbing out of the retractor and then letting • Improper installation or failure to properly the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it secure a child restraint can lead to failure is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise of the restraint. The child could be badly while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” injured or killed. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Locations directions exactly when installing an infant Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint or child restraint. Systems” for additional information on ALR. ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Please see the table below and the following Top Tether Anchorage Symbol sections for more information. Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install Weight limit of the restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight Child Restraint attach a forward facing child restraint? limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also passenger seat? allows contact.

102 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an No the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): seating position. For some second row seats, shoulder part of the belt until you have you may need to recline the seat and/or raise pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Child restraint systems are designed to be se- the head restraint to get a better fit. If the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt rear seat can be moved forward and rearward back into the retractor. As the webbing re- portion of a lap/shoulder belt. in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its tracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This rear-most position to make room for the child means the seat belt is now in the Automatic WARNING! seat. You may also move the front seat for- Locking mode. ward to allow more room for the child seat. • Improper installation or failure to properly 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If secure a child restraint can lead to failure 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from it is locked, you should not be able to pull out of the restraint. The child could be badly the retractor to pass it through the belt path any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, injured or killed. of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt repeat step 5. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s webbing in the belt path. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to directions exactly when installing an infant 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you tighten the lap portion around the child re- or child restraint. hear a “click.” straint while you push the child restraint 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion rearward and downward into the vehicle tight against the child seat. seat.

103 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap Installing Child Restraints Using The Top 1. Look behind the seating position where you and the seating position has a top tether Tether Anchorage: plan to install the child restraint to find the anchorage, connect the tether strap to the tether anchorage. You may need to move the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See WARNING! seat forward to provide better access to the SAFETY the section “Installing Child Restraints Us- tether anchorage. If there is no top tether ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing anchorage for that seating position, move car seat to any location in front of the car to attach a tether anchor. the child restraint to another position in the seat, including the seat frame or a tether 9. Test that the child restraint is installed vehicle if one is available. anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a tightly by pulling back and forth on the child rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor seat at the belt path. It should not move that is approved for that seating position, directly behind the seat where you are plac- more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any located behind the top of the vehicle seat. ing the child restraint. direction. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for direct path for the strap between the anchor check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if the location of approved tether anchorages in and the child seat. If your vehicle is necessary. your vehicle. equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

104 WARNING! Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown lead to increased head motion and pos- about and possibly injured, or injure a passen- sible injury to the child. Use only the an- ger during panic braking or in a collision. chorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet strap. harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat belts. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat- Tether Strap Mounting SAFETY TIPS backs as you remove slack in the strap. 1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook Center Tether Attachment Transporting Passengers 3 — Attaching B — Tether Anchor 1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to Strap NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE the full down position. CARGO AREA. 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child head restraint. WARNING! restraint to the top tether anchorage as 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child shown in the diagram. • Do not leave children or animals inside restraint to the center tether anchorage lo- parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior 5. Remove slack in the tether strap according cated in the panel between the rear seatback heat build-up may cause serious injury or to the child restraint manufacturer’s and the rear window. death. instructions. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo to the child restraint manufacturer’s area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a instructions. 105 WARNING! WARNING! Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle collision, people riding in these areas are trol BLOWER switch is set at high speed. more likely to be seriously injured or killed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. SAFETY • Do not allow people to ride in any area of • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle Seat Belts your vehicle that is not equipped with seats with the engine running, adjust your heat- and seat belts. ing or cooling controls to force outside air Inspect the seat belt system periodically, check- • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat into the vehicle. Set the blower at high ing for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged and using a seat belt properly. speed. parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. The best protection against carbon monoxide Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced Exhaust Gas entry into the vehicle body is a properly main- after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must tained engine exhaust system. be replaced after a collision if they have been WARNING! Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless detected inside the vehicle, or when the under- or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. side or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a and odorless. Breathing it can make you Air Bag Warning Light unconscious and can eventually poison you. competent mechanic inspect the complete ex- To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety haust system and adjacent body areas for bro- The Air Bag warning light will turn on for tips: ken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or parts. Open seams or loose connections could ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the in confined areas any longer than needed permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passen- light is either not on during starting, stays on, or to move your vehicle in or out of the area. ger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex- turns on while driving, have the system in- • If you are required to drive with the trunk/ haust system each time the vehicle is raised for spected at your authorized dealer as soon as liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. possible. After the bulb check, this light will windows are closed and the climate con- illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will 106 stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light WARNING! WARNING! comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer service the An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Re- stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for inter- straint Systems” in “Safety” for further informa- fasteners may cause your floor mat to interference, with the vehicle properly parked tion. fere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch with the engine off, fully depress the accel- pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if Defroster prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of Check operation by selecting the defrost mode • ALWAYS securely attach your floor any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, and place the blower control on high speed. You mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn remove the floor mat from the vehicle and should be able to feel the air directed against your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm place the floor mat in your trunk. the windshield. See your authorized dealer for mat is secured using the floor mat fasten- • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on service if your defroster is inoperable. ers on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. Floor Mat Safety Information • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before slide into the driver’s side floor area when Always use floor mats designed to fit your ve- installing any other floor mat. NEVER in- the vehicle is moving. Objects can become hicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter- stall or stack an additional floor mat on top trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your control. securely attached using the floor mat fasteners vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that • NEVER place any objects under the floor so it cannot slip out of position and interfere cannot be properly attached and secured mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be could change the position of the floor mat impair safe operation of your vehicle in other replaced, only use a FCA approved floor and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. ways. mat for the specific make, model, and year • If the vehicle carpet has been removed and of your vehicle. re-installed, always properly attach carpet

107 WARNING! Lights WARNING! to the floor and check the floor mat fasten- Have someone observe the operation of brake • The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is ers are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully lights and exterior lights while you work the for race vehicles on race tracks. To help

SAFETY depress each pedal to check for interfer- controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi- ensure the safety of the race driver, engi- ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch cator lights on the instrument panel. neers should supervise the installation of pedals then re-install the floor mats. Door Latches “Track-Use” parts. • It is recommended to only use mild soap • FCA US LLC does not authorize the instal- and water to clean your floor mats. After Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. lation or use of any part noted as “Track- cleaning, always check your floor mat has Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first been properly installed and is secured to Fluid Leaks retail sale. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. WARNING! Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause • ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip- Outside The Vehicle should be located and corrected immediately. ment before driving on public roads. • ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat Tires WARNING! belts when driving on public roads. • In a collision, you and your passengers can Examine tires for excessive tread wear and un- To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH suffer much greater injuries if you are not even wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, when using “Track-Use” parts and equip- properly buckled up. You can strike the glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or ment: interior of your vehicle or other passengers, sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. • NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. on public roads. FCA US LLC does not Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the authorize the use of “Track-Use” equip- tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation ment on public roads. pressure. 108 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 110 To Accelerate For Passing ...... 120 LANESENSE ...... 125 Normal Starting ...... 110 To Resume Speed ...... 120 LaneSense Operation...... 125 To Deactivate ...... 120 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 111 Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 126 Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission. . . .112 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ...... 120 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA...... 126 Activation ...... 121 DRIVE MODES — SRT ...... 116 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 128 To Set A Desired ACC Speed ...... 121 Launch Control — If Equipped ...... 116 To Vary The ACC Speed ...... 121 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . .129 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE To Resume...... 122 Materials Added To Fuel ...... 129 CONTROL ...... 117 Deactivation ...... 123 TRAILER TOWING ...... 130 SPEED CONTROL...... 118 Setting The Following Distance ...... 123 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum To Activate ...... 118 Changing Modes (ACC Only) ...... 123 Trailer Weight Ratings) ...... 130 To Set A Desired Speed ...... 119 General Information ...... 125 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND To Vary The Speed Setting ...... 119 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST...... 125 MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 130

109 STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, could operate power windows, other con- engine is obtained without pumping or pressing adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten trols, or move the vehicle. the accelerator pedal. your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other • Do not leave children or animals inside To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/ occupants to buckle their seat belts. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or STOP Button WARNING! death. 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP • When exiting the vehicle, always make Normal Starting button. sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle 2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. START/STOP Button and lock the vehicle. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or 1. The transmission must be in PARK. ENGINE START/STOP button must be held

STARTING AND OPERATING with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leav- 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while push- for two seconds or three short pushes in a ing children in a vehicle unattended is ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph dangerous for a number of reasons. A child (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The or others could be seriously or fatally in- 3. The system takes over and attempts to start ignition will remain in the ACC mode until jured. Children should be warned not to the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the the gear selector is in PARK and the button touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the starter will disengage automatically after is pushed twice to the OFF mode. If the gear transmission gear selector. 10 seconds. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- START/STOP button is pushed once, the prior to the engine starting, push the button dren), and do not leave the ignition (of a instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- again. Not In Park” message and the engine will Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

110 NOTE: 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a WARNING! If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and third time to return the ignition to the OFF release the ENGINE START/STOP button with mode. PARK position is properly indicated, before the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) before exiting the vehicle. the engine will shut off, and the ignition will AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher remain in the ACC position. The system will than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly automatically time out and the ignition will WARNING! pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN • Never use the PARK position as a substi- You could lose control of the vehicle and tute for the parking brake. Always apply the (engine not running) mode and the transmission hit someone or something. Only shift into parking brake fully when exiting the ve- is in PARK. gear when the engine is idling normally hicle to guard against vehicle movement and your foot is firmly pressing the brake ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With and possible injury or damage. pedal. Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or • Your vehicle could move and injure you • Unintended movement of a vehicle could NEUTRAL Position) and others if it is not in PARK. Check by injure those in or near the vehicle. As with trying to move the transmission gear selec- The ENGINE START/STOP button operates all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle tor out of PARK with the brake pedal re- similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: while the engine is running. Before exiting leased. Make sure the transmission is in OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, PARK before exiting the vehicle. modes without starting the vehicle and use the then apply the parking brake, shift the • The transmission may not engage PARK if accessories, follow these directions: transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- the vehicle is moving. Always bring the tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode. vehicle to a complete stop before shifting mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, to PARK, and verify that the transmission 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once securing the vehicle against unwanted gear position indicator solidly indicates to place the ignition to the ACC mode. movement. PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the • When exiting the vehicle, always make 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a vehicle is completely stopped, and the second time to place the ignition to the RUN sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re- mode. 111 WARNING! CAUTION! WARNING! move the key fob from the vehicle, and • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, • The transmission may not engage PARK if lock the vehicle. NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is the vehicle is moving. Always bring the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or above idle speed. vehicle to a complete stop before shifting with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow- • Before shifting into any gear, make sure to PARK, and verify that the transmission ing children to be in a vehicle unattended your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. gear position indicator solidly indicates is dangerous for a number of reasons. A PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the child or others could be seriously or fatally NOTE: vehicle is completely stopped, and the injured. Children should be warned not to You must press and hold the brake pedal while PARK position is properly indicated, be- touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shifting out of PARK. fore exiting the vehicle. transmission gear selector. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or • Do not leave the key fob in or near the Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly dren), and do not leave the ignition in the WARNING! pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could STARTING AND OPERATING ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op- accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. erate power windows, other controls, or • Never use the PARK position as a substi- You could lose control of the vehicle and move the vehicle. tute for the parking brake. Always apply hit someone or something. Only shift into the parking brake fully when exiting the gear when the engine is idling normally vehicle to guard against vehicle movement CAUTION! and your foot is firmly pressing the brake and possible injury or damage. pedal. • Your vehicle could move and injure you Damage to the transmission may occur if the • Unintended movement of a vehicle could and others if it is not in PARK. Check by following precautions are not observed: injure those in or near the vehicle. As with trying to move the transmission gear selec- • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle tor out of PARK with the brake pedal re- after the vehicle has come to a complete while the engine is running. Before exiting leased. Make sure the transmission is in stop. a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, PARK before exiting the vehicle. then apply the parking brake, shift the

112 WARNING! The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both on the gear selector and in the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- instrument cluster. tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, To select a gear range, press the lock button on securing the vehicle against unwanted the gear selector and move the selector rearward movement. or forward. To shift the transmission out of • When exiting the vehicle, always make PARK, the engine must be running and the sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, re- brake pedal must be pressed. You must also move the key fob from the vehicle, and press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL lock the vehicle. into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allow- DRIVE range for normal driving. ing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A NOTE: Transmission Gear Selector child or others could be seriously or fatally In the event of a mismatch between the gear injured. Children should be warned not to selector position and the actual transmission 1 — Lock Button touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear (for example, driver selects PARK while 2 — Gear Selector transmission gear selector. driving), the position indicator will blink con- • Do not leave the key fob in or near the tinuously until the selector is returned to the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- proper position, or the requested shift can be The electronically-controlled transmission dren), and do not leave the ignition in the completed. adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could op- along with environmental and road conditions. erate power windows, other controls, or The transmission electronics are self- move the vehicle. calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). 113 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when Refer to Automatic Transmission in the The current transmission gear will be displayed the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ in the instrument cluster, along with a high- stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or lighted "M" (Manual) indication. When the gear pedal when shifting between these gears. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for selector is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the further details. gear selector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift The transmission gear selector provides PARK, paddle on the steering wheel, if equipped) to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL AutoStick downshift the transmission to the next lower (Autostick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+) made using the Autostick shift control. Toggling feature providing manual shift control, giving shift paddle, if equipped) to command an up- the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick al- shift. while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (be- lows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate side the DRIVE position) will manually select undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im- the transmission gear, and will display the cur- prove overall vehicle performance. rent gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, This system can also provide you with more

STARTING AND OPERATING M3, etc, Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for control during passing, city driving, cold slip- further information. pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer tow- NOTE: ing, and many other situations. Shifter Paddles If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, Operation REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed 1 — (–) Shift Paddle forward) it is probably in the MANUAL When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) 2 — (+) Shift Paddle position, the transmission will operate auto- (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi- matically, shifting between the eight available tion). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the trans- gears. To activate AutoStick, move the gear mission gear is displayed in the instrument clus- selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside ter (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector the DRIVE position). to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. 114 NOTE: • In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in • You can start out, from a stop, in first or DRIVE), the transmission will automatically • Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow shift up when maximum engine speed is shift paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear starting in second gear. Starting out in second selector is in DRIVE, will activate a temporary reached. If the accelerator is fully depressed, gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions. AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter the transmission will downshift when possible • If a requested downshift would cause the AutoStick mode will downshift the transmis- (based on current vehicle speed and gear, engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur. sion to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of accel- • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at enter AutoStick mode will retain the current erator pedal activity will cause the transmis- gear. The current gear will be displayed in the sion to revert to automatic operation. too low of a vehicle speed. instrument cluster, but the "M" will not be • If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear • Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if highlighted. The transmission will revert back selector in MANUAL position), manual gear equipped), or holding the gear selector in the to normal operation (if the gear selector re- selection will be maintained until the gear (-) position, will downshift the transmission to mains in DRIVE) after a period of time, de- selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described the lowest gear possible at the current speed. pending on accelerator pedal activity. below. The transmission will not upshift auto- • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable • In some models, the shift paddles may be matically at redline in this mode, nor will when AutoStick is enabled. disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using the downshifts be obtained if the accelerator • The system may revert to automatic shift Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting pedal is pressed to the floor. Performance Control from the Apps menu in mode if a fault or overheat condition is the Uconnect screen. • The transmission will automatically downshift detected. as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lug- In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift ging) and will display the current gear. To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the driver (using the gear selector, or the shift • The transmission will automatically downshift the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lug- to first gear when coming to a stop. After a selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once ging or overspeed condition would result. It will stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) again indicated in the instrument cluster. You remain in the selected gear until another upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any or downshift is chosen, except as described time without taking your foot off the accelerator below. pedal. 115 WARNING! tion control that manages tire slip while launch- Launch Control is available when the following ing the vehicle. This feature is intended for use procedure is followed: Do not downshift for additional engine brak- during race events on a closed course where 1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels consistent quarter mile (400m) and 0 to 60 stack switch bank. could lose their grip and the vehicle could (100km/h) times are desired. The system is not skid, causing a collision or personal injury. intended to compensate for lack of driver expe- NOTE: rience or familiarity with the race track. Use of Pushing the SRT button on the center stack DRIVE MODES — SRT this feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, or pressing Race Options within Drive etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slip Modes, then selecting the Launch Control Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive outside this systems control resulting in an tab, followed by the soft, Launch Control Mode feature. This feature gives the driver con- aborted launch. button are two other options to access trol over the systems in the vehicle which affect launch control features. Please refer to “SRT its performance, enabling the driver to tune it NOTE: Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in the Own- for desired driving scenarios. Launch control is not available within the first er’s Manual on www.mopar.com/en-us/ STARTING AND OPERATING 500 miles (804 km) of engine break-in. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or NOTE: Preconditions: www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents), Refer to “SRT Drive Modes” in “Multimedia” in or the “Drive Modes Supplement”, for further the Owner’s Manual on www.mopar.com/en-us/ • Launch control should not be used on public information. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or roads. Always check track conditions and the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for surrounding area. 2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on further descriptions of these modes. • Launch Control should only be used when the the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum Launch Control — If Equipped engine and transmission are at operating temperature. launch/traction. This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, 3. Push the “Activate Launch Control” button system that is designed to allow the driver to paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery or on the touchscreen. achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle 4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving. straight line. Launch Control is a form of trac- components and is not recommended. 116 5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing5 Launch control will abort before launch comple- SPORT MODE — WITHOUT straight. tion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster PERFORMANCE CONTROL 6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is under any the following conditions: in “DRIVE” or “AutoStick” position. • The accelerator pedal is released during Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode launch. ESC system continues in ESC Full feature. This mode is a configuration set up for 7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the ON. typical enthusiast driving. The engine, trans- accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The mission, and steering systems are all set to their engine speed will hold at the RPM that was • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide im- set in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen. longer moving in a straight line. proved throttle response and modified shifting NOTE: • The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change for an enhanced driving experience, as well the Messages will appear in the instrument cluster the system to another mode. greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may to inform the driver if one or more of the above NOTE: be activated and deactivated by pushing the conditions have not been met. After launch control has been aborted, ESC will Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank. 8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been return to its current ESC mode. met, the instrument cluster display will read For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “Launch Ready Release Brake”. CAUTION! “SUPER TRACK PACK” button, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight. Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ are spinning and do not have traction. Dam- Launch control will be active until the vehicle care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or age to the transmission may occur. reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for ESC system will return to its current ESC mode. further details, or in the “Drive Mode Supple- ment” within your Owner’s information kit for further information.

117 SPEED CONTROL NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed When engaged, the Speed Control takes over Control System has been designed to shut down accelerator operations at speeds greater than if multiple Speed Control functions are oper- 25 mph (40 km/h). ated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed The Speed Control buttons are located on the Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting right side of the steering wheel. the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To turn the system

STARTING AND OPERATING Speed Control Switches off, push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the 1 — Push Cancel instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed 2 — Push Set+/Accel Control is off. The system should be turned off 3 — Push Resume when not in use. 4 — Push On/Off 5 — Push Set-/Decel WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

118 To Set A Desired Speed U.S. Speed (mph) strument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- has reached the desired speed, push the SET a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse- nadian Residents) for more information. The (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the quent tap of the button results in an increase speed increment shown is dependant on the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the of 1 mph. chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a • If the button is continually pushed, the set (km/h): message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH speed will continue to increase until the but- (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was ton is released, then the new set speed will be U.S. Speed (mph) set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set established. • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in speed will also appear and stay on in the instru- a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse- ment cluster when the speed is set. Metric Speed (km/h) quent tap of the button results in a decrease of To Vary The Speed Setting • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in 1 mph. a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse- To Increase Speed quent tap of the button results in an increase • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the but- of 1 km/h. When the Speed Control is set, you can increase ton is released, then the new set speed will be speed by pushing the SET (+) button. • If the button is continually pushed, the set established. speed will continue to increase until the but- The driver's preferred units can be selected Metric Speed (km/h) through the instrument panel settings if ton is released, then the new set speed will be established. equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in strument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual at To Decrease Speed a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html quent tap of the button results in a decrease of When the Speed Control is set, you can de- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca 1 km/h. crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. (Canadian Residents) for more information. The • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed increment shown is dependant on the The driver's preferred units can be selected speed will continue to decrease until the but- chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric through the instrument panel settings if ton is released, then the new set speed will be (km/h): equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In- established. 119 To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) Press the accelerator as you would normally. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES When the pedal is released, the vehicle will button and release. Resume can be used at any return to the set speed. speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). Using Speed Control On Hills To Deactivate The transmission may downshift on hills to A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC maintain the vehicle set speed. button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control NOTE: without erasing the set speed from memory. The Speed Control system maintains speed up Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition and down hills. A slight speed change on mod- switch OFF erases the set speed from memory. erate hills is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. Adaptive Cruise Switches WARNING! 1—Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off 2 — Distance Setting – Decrease Speed Control can be dangerous where the 3 — Distance Setting – Increase system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy Control, the controls operate exactly the same traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow- as Speed Control with only a couple of differ- covered or slippery.

120 ences. With this option, you can set a specified If the system is set when the vehicle speed is The driver's preferred units can be selected distance you would like to maintain between below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be through the instrument panel settings if you and the vehicle in front of you. defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In- set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html will apply limited braking or acceleration auto- speed of the vehicle. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- matically to maintain a preset following dis- nadian Residents) for further details. The speed tance, while matching the speed of the vehicle NOTE: increment shown is dependant on the chosen ahead. ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of in front of your vehicle in close proximity. U.S. Speed (mph) you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel- • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in Activation erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will dis- of 1 mph. (ACC) on/off button. play in the instrument cluster display. • If the button is continually pushed, the set ACC READY will appear in the instrument clus- • The system will not be controlling the distance speed will continue to increase in 5 mph ter display to indicate the ACC is on. between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. increments until the button is released. The The vehicle speed will only be determined by To Set A Desired ACC Speed increase in set speed is reflected in the instru- the position of the accelerator pedal. ment cluster display. When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button To Vary The ACC Speed Metric Speed (km/h) and release. The instrument cluster display will To Increase Speed • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in display the set speed. While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse- by pushing the SET (+) button. quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

121 • If the button is continually pushed, the set • If the button is continually pushed, the set • The ACC system applies the brake down to a speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph full stop when following a target vehicle. If an increments until the button is released. The decrements until the button is released. The ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a increase in set speed is reflected in the instru- decrease in set speed is reflected in the in- standstill, the host vehicle will release the ment cluster display. strument cluster display. vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop. To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) • The ACC system maintains set speed when • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in While ACC is set, the set speed can be de- driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse- creased by pushing the SET (-) button. speed change on moderate hills is normal. In quent tap of the button results in a decrease The driver's preferred units can be selected addition, downshifting may occur while of 1 km/h. through the instrument panel settings if climbing uphill or descending downhill. This equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your In- • If the button is continually pushed, the set is normal operation and necessary to maintain strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, decrements until the button is released. The the ACC system will cancel if the braking

STARTING AND OPERATING www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- decrease in set speed is reflected in the in- temperature exceeds normal range nadian Residents) for further details. The speed strument cluster display. (overheated). decrement shown is dependant on the chosen NOTE: To Resume speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): • When you override and push the SET (+) If there is a set speed in memory push the RES U.S. Speed (mph) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed (resume) button and then remove your foot from • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in will be the current speed of the vehicle. the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse- • When you use the SET (-) button to deceler- display will display the last set speed. quent tap of the button results in a decrease ate, if the engine’s braking power does not NOTE: of 1 mph. slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary speed, the brake system will automatically vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close slow the vehicle. proximity. 122 WARNING! Setting The Following Distance Changing Modes (ACC Only) The specified following distance for ACC can be If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode The Resume function should only be used if set by varying the distance setting between four can be turned off and the system can be oper- traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me- ated as Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control a set speed that is too high or too low for dium) and one bar (short). Using this distance mode. While in the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise prevailing traffic and road conditions could setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates Control mode the distance setting feature will cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This be disabled and the system will maintain the too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol- distance setting appears in the instrument clus- speed you set. low these warnings can result in a collision ter display. and death or serious personal injury. • To change between the different cruise control • To increase the distance setting, push the modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control Deactivation Distance Setting—Increase button and re- (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control lease. Each time the button is pushed, the the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. distance setting increases by one bar (longer). (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the • Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise system off. • To decrease the distance setting, push the Control on/off button will result in turning on Distance Setting—Decrease button and re- (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will appear lease. Each time the button is pushed, the Cruise Control mode. in the instrument cluster display to indicate the distance setting decreases by one bar Refer to your Owner’s Manual at ACC is off. (shorter). www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html WARNING! (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further details. Leaving the ACC system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

123 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop The Cruise Control system has two control nience system. It is not a substitute for active while following a target vehicle and hold modes: driving involvement. It is always the driver’s the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop posi- • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main- responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, tion. If the target vehicle does not start taining an appropriate distance between and weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis- moving within two seconds the ACC sys- vehicles. tance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor- tem will display a message that the system • Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode tantly, brake operation to ensure safe opera- will release the brakes and that the brakes for cruising at a constant preset speed. For tion of the vehicle under all road conditions. must be applied manually. An audible additional information, refer to “Normal Your complete attention is always required chime will sound when the brakes are (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in while driving to maintain safe control of your released. your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can You should switch off the ACC system: en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Resi- result in a collision and death or serious • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy dents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex

STARTING AND OPERATING personal injury. Residents) for further details. The ACC system: driving situations (i.e., in highway con- Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming struction zones). react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a • When entering a turn lane or highway off of the mode selected. stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a dis- ramp; when driving on roads that are wind- You can change the mode by using the Cruise abled vehicle). ing, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have Control buttons. The two control modes func- • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather steep uphill or downhill slopes. tion differently. Always confirm which mode conditions into account, and may be lim- • When towing a trailer up or down steep is selected. ited upon adverse sight distance condi- slopes. tions. • When circumstances do not allow safe • Does not always fully recognize complex driving at a constant speed. driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

124 General Information PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST NOTE: • The sensors can detect obstacles from ap- The following regulatory statement applies to all The ParkSense Park Assist system provides vi- proximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this sual and audible indications of the distance 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear bumper vehicle: between the rear bumper and a detected ob- while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC stacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking will display in the instrument cluster display Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt maneuver. only when “Sound and Display” is selected RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with from the Uconnect System. following two conditions: the ParkSense switch, located on the switch • As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, 1. This device may not cause harmful panel below the Uconnect display. the instrument cluster display will show fewer interference. NOTE: arcs and the sound tone will change from 2. This device must accept any interference ParkSense will retain the last system state (en- slow, to fast, to continuous. received, including interference that may abled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle Refer to your Owner's Manual at cause undesired operation. when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html position. NOTE: (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- ParkSense can be active only when the gear nadian Residents) for further information. proved by the party responsible for compliance selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled could void the user’s authority to operate the at this gear selector position, the system will LANESENSE equipment. remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or LaneSense Operation above. The system will become active again if The LaneSense system is operational at speeds the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a for- The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear ward looking camera to detect lane markings fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the ve- and measure vehicle position within the lane hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. boundaries. 125 When both lane markings are detected and the NOTE: NOTE: driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no When operating conditions have been met, the The LaneSense system will retain the last sys- turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro- LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s tem state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle vides a haptic warning in the form of torque hands are on the steering wheel and provides an when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN applied to the steering wheel to prompt the audible warning to the driver when the driver’s position. driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel. the driver continues to unintentionally drift out The system will cancel if the driver does not PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a return their hands to the wheel. CAMERA visual warning through the instrument cluster Turning LaneSense On Or Off display to prompt the driver to remain within the Your vehicle may be equipped with the lane boundaries. The default status of LaneSense is off. ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surround- The driver may manually override the haptic The LaneSense button is located on the center ings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector warning by applying torque into the steering stack below the Uconnect display. is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is

STARTING AND OPERATING wheel at any time. To turn the LaneSense located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear When only a single lane marking is detected and system on, push the license plate. The image will be displayed in the the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane LaneSense button (LED touchscreen display along with a caution note to marking (no turn signal applied), the Lane- turns off). A “Lane- “check entire surroundings” across the top of Sense system provides visual and haptic warn- Sense On” message is the screen. After five seconds, this note will ings through the instrument cluster display to shown in the instrument disappear. prompt the driver to remain within the lane. cluster display. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once (LED turns on).

126 NOTE: When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro- the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle CAUTION! grammable modes of operation that may be and its projected backup path based on the • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to steering wheel position. The active guide lines only be used as a parking aid. The “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your will show separate zones that will help indicate ParkView camera is unable to view every Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ the distance to the rear of the vehicle. obstacle or object in your drive path. owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or Different colored zones indicate the distance to • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for the rear of the vehicle. be driven slowly when using ParkView to be further details. able to stop in time when an obstacle is If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera WARNING! seen. It is recommended that the driver Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear cam- look frequently over his/her shoulder when era image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds Drivers must be careful when backing up using ParkView. when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up However, this feature is canceled if the forward Camera. Always check carefully behind your NOTE: vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance transmission is shifted into PARK, the vehicle's animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, ignition is cycled to OFF, or by pressing the blind spots before backing up. You are re- rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not image defeat [X] button. sponsible for the safety of your surroundings cover the lens. and must continue to pay attention while When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE backing up. Failure to do so can result in (with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera serious injury or death. mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.

127 REFUELING THE VEHICLE NOTE: NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the 1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (lo- the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow cated in the driver's door map pocket). lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice for emergency refueling with a gas can. buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door. 3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system. 4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper Emergency Fuel Funnel door while refueling. WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open latches allowing the flapper door to open. or the tank is being filled. Fuel Door Release Button 5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel • Never add fuel when the engine is running. nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is This is in violation of most state and fed- 2. Open the fuel filler door. full. eral fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. 6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a allow nozzle to drain. portable container that is inside of a ve- 7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel hicle. You could be burned. Always place door. fuel containers on the ground while filling.

128 CAUTION! Materials Added To Fuel

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not Designated TOP TIER De- “top off” the fuel tank after filling. tergent Gasoline contains a higher level of deter- Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release gents to further aide in If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage the fuel filler door emergency release located in of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. the trunk. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in Detergent Gasoline Retailers. case of an emergency: Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning 1. Open the trunk. agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may 2. Remove the access cover (located on the left Fuel Door Emergency Release contain active solvents or similar ingredients. side inner trim panel). 3. Pull the release cable. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia- phragm materials.

129 TRAILER TOWING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. 3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Trailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Super- RECREATIONAL TOWING CAUTION! charged engine is not recommended. (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing this vehicle in violation of the above Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the requirements can cause severe transmission ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. and/or transfer case damage. Damage from The only acceptable method for towing this improper towing is not covered under the STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle New Vehicle Limited Warranty. trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.

130 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 132 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED...... 146 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — Replacement Bulbs...... 132 Tire Service Kit Storage ...... 146 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION ...... 154 FUSES ...... 134 Tire Service Kit Components And FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 156 Operation ...... 146 General Information ...... 134 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .....147 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 157 Underhood Fuses ...... 134 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.....148 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ...... 157 Rear Interior Fuses ...... 137 BATTERY LOCATION ...... 151 Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ...... 158 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...... 141 JUMP STARTING ...... 151 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .....141 (EARS) ...... 158 Preparations For Jacking ...... 142 Preparations For Jump Start...... 151 Jacking And Changing A Tire ...... 143 Jump Starting Procedure ...... 152 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...... 158 Road Tire Installation...... 145 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 153

131 BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194 Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

132 Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Low/High Beam Headlamp 9005SL+ (Standard Halogen Bi Function Projector) Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) (Premium HID Bi Function Projector) Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

133 FUSES General Information CAUTION! The fuses protect electrical systems against WARNING! excessive current. • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the • When replacing a blown fuse, always use When a device does not work, you must check cover is properly positioned and fully an appropriate replacement fuse with the the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a latched. Failure to do so may allow water to same amp rating as the original fuse. break/melt. get into the power distribution center and Never replace a fuse with another fuse of Also, please be aware that when using power possibly result in an electrical system fail- higher amp rating. Never replace a blown outlets for extended periods of time with the ure. fuse with metal wires or any other material. engine off may result in vehicle battery dis- • When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor- Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker charge. tant to use only a fuse having the correct cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a fuses may result in serious personal injury, Underhood Fuses rating other than indicated may result in a IN CASE OF EMERGENCY fire and/or property damage. dangerous electrical system overload. If a The Front Power Distribution Center is located • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the properly rated fuse continues to blow, it in the engine compartment. This module con- ignition is off and that all the other services indicates a problem in the circuit that tains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and are switched off and/or disengaged. must be corrected. descriptions are printed on the inside of the • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact power distribution center cover. an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

134 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 1 – – Fuse – Spare 2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged) 3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped 4 30 Amp Pink – Starter 5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake 6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake 7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1 8 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2 9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped 10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police 11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns 12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 13 – – Fuse – Spare 14 – – Fuse – Spare 15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped 16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped 18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged) 19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped 20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor 21 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washers – If Equipped 20 Amp Blue – Police Police Bat Feed #2 22 40 Amp Green / – Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3 20 Amp Blue – Police

135 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1 24 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3 28 – – Fuse – Spare 29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger/Charger Police) / Electronic Shift Module (Challenger) 30 – – Fuse – Spare 31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module 32 – – Fuse – Spare 33 – – Fuse – Spare 34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2 36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module 37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering Module (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM 38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay / Rad Fan Relays (Challenger) 48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped 49 – – Fuse – Spare 50 – – Fuse – Spare 51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump 52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped 53 – – Fuse – Spare

136 Rear Interior Fuses CAUTION! CAUTION! There is also a power distribution center located amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a • When installing the power distribution center in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. rating other than indicated may result in a cover, it is important to ensure the cover is This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly positioned and fully latched. Failure cavity location and descriptions are printed on properly rated fuse continues to blow, it to do so may allow water to get into the power the inside of the power distribution center cover. indicates a problem in the circuit that distribution center and possibly result in an must be corrected. electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1 3 – – Fuse – Spare 4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police 5 20 Amp Blue – Police 6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1 7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2 8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting 9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks 10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module 11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module 12 – 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped 15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower

137 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police 17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police 18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police 19 – – Fuse – Spare 20 – – Fuse – Spare 21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT Demon) 22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Mod 23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port 24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack 25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger/300) /

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 26 Electronic Shift Module (Charger/300) 27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped 31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped 32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – 33 If Equipped 34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300) 35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor 36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped 37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio 38 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub 40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT Demon – If Equipped)

138 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT Demon – If Equipped) 42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module 43 (Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats) 44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (Charger/300) / Humidity Sensor 45 / Forward Facing Camera (Lane Departure) / Cyber Gateway 46 – – Fuse – Spare 47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped 48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L / 6.2L) 49 – – Fuse – Spare 50 – – Fuse – Spare 51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped 52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped 53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor 54 – – Fuse – Spare 55 – – Fuse – Spare 56 – – Fuse – Spare 57 – – Fuse – Spare 58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police 60 – – Fuse – Spare 61 – – Fuse – Spare

139 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 62 – – Fuse – Spare 63 – – Fuse – Spare 64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300) 65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 66 – – Fuse – Spare Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror / 67 – 10 Amp Red Police Run Acc Relay Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (Charger/300) Rear Sunshade 68 – 10 Amp Red (Charger/300) RR USB Timer 69 – – Fuse – Spare 70 – – Fuse – Spare IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

140 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage 3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counterclockwise to remove it. The jack and spare tire are both stowed under WARNING! an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull NOTE: far enough off the road to avoid the danger The spare tire must be removed in order to of being hit when operating the jack or access the jack. changing the wheel. 1. Open the trunk. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap. fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the Spare Tire Fastener vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for Spare Tire/Tools Location 4. Remove the spare tire. changing tires only. The jack should not be 1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. 2 — Spare Tire The vehicle should be jacked on a firm 3 — Pull Strap level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

141 5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack coun- WARNING! 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel terclockwise to remove it. diagonally opposite of the jacking position A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli- using the provided wheel chocks. For ex- sion or hard stop could endanger the occu- ample, if changing the right front tire, chock pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack the left rear wheel. Place both chocks under parts and the spare tire in the places pro- the tire. vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING!

Jack Fastener Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far 6. Remove the wheel chocks, jack and lug enough off the road to avoid being hit when wrench assembly from under the spare tire. operating the jack or changing the wheel. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the Wheel Chocks lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. jack assembly. 3. Apply the parking brake. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. when the vehicle is being jacked. 5. Turn off the ignition.

142 Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING! CAUTION! WARNING! • If working on or near a roadway, be ex- Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking tremely careful of motor traffic. on locations other than those indicated in the Carefully follow these tire changing warnings • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. to help prevent personal injury or damage to are securely stowed, spares must be your vehicle: stowed with the valve stem facing the 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, • Always park on a firm, level surface as far ground. and lug wrench. from the edge of the roadway as possible NOTE: before raising the vehicle. For SRT Models, the spare tire must be used • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, wheel to be raised. move the rear tire to the front and use the • Apply the parking brake firmly and set an spare tire on the rear. automatic transmission in PARK. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a Spare Tire Label jack. If you need to get under a raised 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where vehicle, take it to a service center where it the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the can be raised on a lift. lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully • Only use the jack in the positions indicated before raising the vehicle. and for lifting this vehicle during a tire Warning Label change.

143 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.

NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into IN CASE OF EMERGENCY position. Rear Jacking Location Front Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts and tire. 7. Mount the spare tire. 144 CAUTION! en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. NOTE: Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca For the SRT model the correct wheel nut Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve (Canadian Residents) for additional warn- tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m). stem facing outward. The vehicle could be ings, cautions, and information about the 11. Stow the wheel chocks, jack, tools and flat damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor- spare tire, its use, and operation. tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces rectly. 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end the front of the vehicle before tightening of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly down the fastener. tighten the lug nuts. WARNING!

WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occu- To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until parts and the spare tire in the places pro- the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol- vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or low this warning may result in serious injury. replaced immediately. 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Road Tire Installation Installing Compact Spare 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. NOTE: on the wrench while at the end of the 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone handle for increased leverage. Tighten the shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. • For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has Lightly tighten the lug nuts. to install a center cap or wheel cover on been tightened twice. The correct tightness the compact spare. of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If • Refer to “Tires—General Information” in in doubt about the correct tightness, have “Servicing And Maintenance” in your them checked with a torque wrench by your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/ authorized dealer or service station. 145 WARNING! TIRE SERVICE KIT — Tire Service Kit Components And Operation IF EQUIPPED To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol- tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. low this warning may result in serious injury. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning used in outside temperatures down to approxi- the jack handle counterclockwise. mately -4°F (-20°C). 4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Techni- This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allow- cal Specifications” for proper lug nut torque. ing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY torque with a torque wrench to ensure that (90 km/h). all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk. Tire Service Kit Components 1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob 2 — Deflation 6 — Sealant Hose Button (Clear) 3 — Pressure 7 — Air Pump Gauge Hose (Black) 4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)

146 Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the fol- • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select lowing symbols to indicate the air or sealant and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating mode. date (printed at the lower right hand corner on such items to avoid injecting sealant into the bottle label) to assure optimum operation Selecting Air Mode them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only of the system. Refer to “Sealing A Tire With intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air And Hose Replacement”. Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode. • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) hoses. Selecting Sealant Mode are a one tire application use and need to be Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this position replaced after each use. Always replace these WARNING! to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to components immediately at your original inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear equipment vehicle dealer. • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of hose) (6) when selecting this mode. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far form, clean water, and a damp cloth will re- enough off the road to avoid the danger of Using The Power Button move the material from the vehicle or tire and being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) once to wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release can easily be peeled off and properly dis- vehicle under the following circumstances: the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire carded. • If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or Service Kit. • For optimum performance, make sure the larger. valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before Using The Deflation Button • If the tire has any sidewall damage. connecting the Tire Service Kit. Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air • If the tire has any damage from driv- • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. ing with extremely low tire pressure. inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with • If the tire has any damage from driv- two needles, located in the Accessory Storage ing on a flat tire. Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) 147 WARNING! WARNING! 4. Apply the parking brake. • If the wheel has any damage. Service Kit out of reach of children. If (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: • If you are unsure of the condition of swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn the tire or the wheel. plenty of water and drink plenty of water. to the Sealant Mode position. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physi- flames or heat source. cian immediately. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then re- • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a move the cap from the fitting at the end of collision or hard stop could endanger the Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit the hose. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Fail- next to the deflated tire. ure to follow these warnings can result in 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY passengers, and others around you. then screw the fitting at the end of the • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem. the deflated tire) is in a position that is near Service Kit to come in contact with hair, 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the NOTE: respiratory irritation. Flush immediately ground. This will provide the best positioning Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or with plenty of water if there is any contact of the kit when injecting the sealant into the nails) from the tire. with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon deflated tire and running the air pump. Move (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into as possible, if there is any contact with the vehicle as necessary to place the valve clothing. stem in this position before proceeding. The Deflated Tire: • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto trans- • Always start the engine before turning ON the latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, Tire Service Kit. consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire mission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position. 148 NOTE: 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or an- immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is Manual transmission vehicles must have the other vehicle, if available. Make sure the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in empty. Continue to operate the pump and engine is running before turning ON the Tire NEUTRAL. inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on Service Kit. the tire pressure label on the driver-side • After pushing the Power Button (4), the seal- 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check ant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant previous use. Call for assistance. the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and Gauge (3). into the tire. NOTE: If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the pump is operating, air will dispense from the the tire. Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt (6). to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): NOTE: Sealant Hose (6): 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the is no longer flowing through the hose (typi- mended inflation pressure before continuing. valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the cally takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pres- or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the sure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi 15 minutes: Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will de- Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire crease quickly from approximately 70 psi 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Service Kit. Service Kit. Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel. 149 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose WARNING! If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to the fitting at the end of the hose, and place Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: Vehicle.” not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pres- warning can result in injuries that are serious CAUTION! sure indicated on the tire and loading infor- or fatal to you, your passengers, and others mation label on the driver-side door opening. • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) around you. may get hot after use, so it should be NOTE: handled carefully. (E) After Driving: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before con- to the recommended inflation pressure be- in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, tinuing. fore continuing. and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the Kit components which may cause perma- to the Air Mode position. valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. nent damage to the kit. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper stor- (D) Drive Vehicle: age area in the vehicle. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in Immediately after injecting sealant and inflat- color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or re- ing the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or (7) onto the valve stem. placed at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center. 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not ex- Pressure Gauge (3). 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the ceed 55 mph (90 km/h). instrument panel after the tire has been repaired. 150 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting WARNING! Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant the hose to its storage area (located on the Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is Bottle And Hose Replacement”. bottom of the air pump). frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. NOTE: 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle. When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- CAUTION! rized dealer or service center that the tire has BATTERY LOCATION been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: The battery is stored under an access cover in any other booster source with a system volt- the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). the right side of the engine compartment for battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release but- jump-starting. system may occur. ton in the recessed area under the sealant bottle. JUMP STARTING NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can follow the manufacturer's operating instructions be jump started using a set of jumper cables Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the and precautions. bottle and dispose of it accordingly. and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting Preparations For Jump Start 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire can be dangerous if done improperly, so please Service Kit housing. follow the procedures in this section carefully. The battery is stored under an access cover in 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns the right side of the engine compartment for with the hose slot in the front of the housing. jump starting. Push the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place. 151 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as fender. whenever the hood is raised. It can start this could establish a ground connection and anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can personal injury could result. be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, Jump Starting Procedure watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. WARNING! You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can Failure to follow this jump starting procedure burn your skin or eyes and generate hydro- could result in personal injury or property gen gas which is flammable and explosive. damage due to battery explosion. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. CAUTION!

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic Failure to follow these procedures could re- transmission into PARK and place the igni- sult in damage to the charging system of the Remote Battery Posts tion in the OFF position. booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces- 1 — Positive Battery Post Connecting The Jumper Cables 2 — Negative Battery Post sary electrical accessories. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the cable to the remote positive (+) post of the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper vehicle with the discharged battery. cables reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 152 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 6. Once the engine is started, remove the cable to the negative (-) post of the booster jumper cables in the reverse sequence: CAUTION! battery. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Accessories plugged into the vehicle power 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, jumper cable from the remote negative (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough post of the vehicle with the discharged without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat- battery. WARNING! tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative battery life and/or prevent the engine from Do not connect the jumper cable to the (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of starting. negative (-) post of the discharged battery. the booster battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS battery to explode and could result in per- jumper cable from the positive (+) post of sonal injury. Only use the specific ground In any of the following situations, you can re- the booster battery. point, do not use any other exposed metal duce the potential for overheating by taking the parts. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive appropriate action. (+) jumper cable from the remote positive • On the highways — slow down. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged booster battery, let the engine idle a few battery. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the minutes, and then start the engine in the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in- vehicle with the discharged battery. If frequent jump starting is required to start your crease the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle you should have the battery and charg- vehicle motion with the brakes. ing system inspected at your authorized dealer.

153 NOTE: WARNING! MANUAL PARK RELEASE — There are steps that you can take to slow down 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION an impending overheat condition: You or others can be badly burned by hot • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from The A/C system adds heat to the engine cool- your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming WARNING! from under the hood, do not open the hood ing system and turning the A/C off can help Always secure your vehicle by fully applying until the radiator has had time to cool. Never remove this heat. the parking brake before activating the try to open a cooling system pressure cap • You can also turn the temperature control to Manual Park Release. In addition, you when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. maximum heat, the mode control to floor and should be seated in the driver's seat with your the blower control to high. This allows the foot firmly on the brake pedal when activat- heater core to act as a supplement to the CAUTION! ing the Manual Park Release. Activating the radiator and aids in removing heat from the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle engine cooling system. Driving with a hot cooling system could dam- to roll away if it is not secured by the parking IN CASE OF EMERGENCY age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge brake, or by proper connection to a tow ve- reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on hicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious turned off until the pointer drops back into injury or death for those in or around the the normal range. If the pointer remains on vehicle. HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for In order to move the vehicle in cases where the service. transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

154 Follow these steps to use the Manual Park 4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish 7. While holding the locking tab in the disen- Release: the tether strap up through the opening in gaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. the console base. the lever up and rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is 2. Remove the console storage bin. 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 6. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the securely connected to a tow vehicle. center of the lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right. To Reset The Manual Park Release: 1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever. 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position. Console Storage Bin 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console. Reinstall the Manual Park Release 3. Remove the plastic cover under the bin by cover and the console storage bin. using the slot provided to access the Manual Park Release lever. Manual Park Release 1 — Tether Strap 2 — Locking Tab

155 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE: CAUTION! Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec- If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial • Racing the engine or spinning the wheels snow, it can often be moved using a rocking Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to may lead to transmission overheating and motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” failure. Allow the engine to idle with the clear the area around the front wheels. Push in your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one and hold the lock button on the gear selector. en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) minute after every five rocking-motion Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) cycles. This will minimize overheating and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. for further information. Once the vehicle has reduce the risk of transmission failure dur- Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres- been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to ing prolonged efforts to free a stuck ve- sure that will maintain the rocking motion, with- restore "ESC On" mode. hicle. out spinning the wheels or racing the engine. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! NOTE: spin the wheels faster than 15 mph Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may re- be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) generated by excessive wheel speeds may sult. or less. Whenever the transmission remains in cause damage, or even failure, of the axle • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must and tires. A tire could explode and injure too fast may lead to transmission overheat- press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels ing and failure. It can also damage the REVERSE. faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer tires. Do not spin the wheels above than 30 seconds continuously without stop- 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans- ping when you are stuck and do not let mission shifting occurring). anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

156 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed •30miles(48km)max distance NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, Front NOT ALLOWED same limitations as above) Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used: Rear NOT RECOMMENDED • Ignition in ON/RUN mode • Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK) Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

Refer to your Owner's Manual at All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models If the transmission and driveline are operable, www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html AWD models can also be towed with the ignition The manufacturer recommends towing your ve- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca in the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEU- hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using (Canadian Residents) for further information. TRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF a flatbed. the ground with no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/ RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable. 157 CAUTION! If the transmission is not operable, or the ve- ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE hicle must be towed faster than 30 mph SYSTEM (EARS) • Towing this vehicle using any other method (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), can cause severe transmission and/or then the only acceptable method of towing is This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced transfer case damage. with a flatbed truck. Accident Response System. • Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- CAUTION! Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” ranty. in “Safety” for further information on the En- Towing this vehicle in violation of the above hanced Accident Response System (EARS) Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models requirements can cause severe engine function. and/or transmission damage. Damage from The manufacturer recommends towing your ve- improper towing is not covered under the EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY a flatbed. This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data If flatbed equipment is not available, and the Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is transmission is operable, this vehicle may be to record data that will assist in understanding flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) how a vehicle’s systems performed under cer- under the following conditions: tain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. • The automatic transmission must be in NEU- TRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” section for instructions on shifting the trans- in “Safety” for further information on the Event mission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off. Data Recorder (EDR). • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). 158 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 160 RAISING THE VEHICLE...... 171 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 186 3.6L And 5.7L Engines ...... 160 TIRES ...... 171 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines . . .164 Treadwear ...... 186 Tire Safety Information ...... 171 Traction Grades ...... 186 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 167 Tires — General Information ...... 178 Temperature Grades ...... 187 3.6L Engine ...... 167 Tire Types ...... 182 5.7L Engine ...... 168 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 183 6.2L Supercharged Engine ...... 169 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 185 6.4L Engine ...... 170

159 SCHEDULED SERVICING Required” message is displayed. Severe Oper- ring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting ating Conditions can cause the change oil mes- To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this guide, 3.6L And 5.7L Engines sage to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil serviced as soon as possible, within the next Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ change indicator system. The oil change indica- 500 miles (800 km). owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or tor system will remind you that it is time to take www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a single further information. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil chime will sound, indicating that an oil change NOTE: change indicator message will illuminate. This is necessary. Under no circumstances should oil change in- means that service is required for your vehicle. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), Operating conditions such as frequent short- indicator message after completing the sched- twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influ- performed by someone other than your autho- run or idle time is generally only a concern for ence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer- fleet customers. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

160 Severe Duty All Models • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By brake master cylinder, and power steering (if Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if Oil Change Indicator System: equipped) and fill as needed. the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road • Change oil and filter environment, or is operated predominantly at • Check function of all interior and exterior • Rotate the tires idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of lights. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. even if it occurs before your next scheduled Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L service Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Required Maintenance Intervals: • Inspect battery and clean and tighten • Check engine oil level. terminals as required Refer to the maintenance schedules on the • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, • Check windshield washer fluid level. following page for the required maintenance drums, hoses and park brake intervals. • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear • Inspect engine cooling system or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of protection and hoses irregular wear, even if it occurs before your • Inspect exhaust system next scheduled service. • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

161 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if XXX X X X X necessary. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive XXX X X X X Only). Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. X X X X X X X Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X Additional Maintenance SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Replace engine air filter. X X X X X Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs. ** X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles XX (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. XX (All Wheel Drive Only).

162 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the XX X following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle based only, yearly intervals do not apply. WARNING! Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if • You can be badly injured working on or the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road around a motor vehicle. Do only service work environment or is operated predominately at for which you have the knowledge and the idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of right equipment. If you have any doubt about vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

163 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines NOTE: At Each Stop For Fuel The scheduled maintenance services listed in • The oil change indicator message will not moni- • Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine this manual must be done at the times or tor the time since the last oil change. Change Compartment” in this chapter for further information. your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since mileages specified to protect your vehicle war- your last oil change, even if the oil change • Check the windshield washer solvent and add ranty and ensure the best vehicle performance indicator message is NOT illuminated. if required. and reliability. More frequent maintenance may • Change your engine oil more often if you drive Once A Month be needed for vehicles in severe operating con- your vehicle off-road/track usage for an ex- ditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip tended period of time. • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear driving. Inspection and service should also be or damage. done anytime a malfunction is suspected. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the The oil change indicator system will remind you six months, whichever comes first. terminals as required. that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched- • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, uled maintenance. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the sched- brake master cylinder, and power steering A “Oil Change Required” message will be dis- uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is (6.2L Only), and add as needed. played in the instrument cluster and a single performed by someone other than your autho- • Check all lights and other electrical items for SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE chime will sound, indicating that an oil change rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer- correct operation. is necessary. ring to the steps described under “Instrument At Each Oil Change Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your In- change indicator message will illuminate. This strument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at • Change the engine oil filter. means that service is required for your vehicle. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca within the next 500 miles (800 km). (Canadian Residents) for further information. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

164 Maintenance Plan — 6.2L And 6.4L

Miles: 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 144,000 150,000 Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers: 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled mainte- XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX nance. If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine XXXXXXXX X X X X air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped XXX X X with four wheel disc brakes. Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent XX X trailer towing. Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; re- XXXXXXXX X X X X place if necessary.

165 Miles: 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000 144,000 150,000 Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

Or Kilometers: 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 160,000 170,000 180,000 190,000 200,000 210,000 220,000 230,000 240,000 250,000 Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X Replace the air conditioning filter. XXXXXXXXXXXX Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary X Replace the spark plugs – XX 6.2L Supercharged Engine ** Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine ** X Flush and replace the engine coolant/intercooler at 120 months if not done at 150,000 miles XX (240,000 km).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ** The spark plug change interval is mileage WARNING! WARNING! based only, yearly intervals do not apply. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain • You can be badly injured working on or your vehicle could result in a component around a motor vehicle. Do only service malfunction and effect vehicle handling work for which you have the knowledge and performance. This could cause an ac- and the right equipment. If you have any cident. doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

166 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 8 — Engine Oil Fill 4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

167 5.7L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

168 6.2L Supercharged Engine

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 3 — Intercooler Fluid Reservoir 9 — Power Steering Reservoir 4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 11 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

169 6.4L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter 3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

170 RAISING THE VEHICLE Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on In the case where it is necessary to raise the U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the vehicle, go to your authorized dealer or service letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding station. the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. TIRES • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to Tire Safety Information this standard have the tire size molded into Tire safety information will cover aspects of the the sidewall beginning with the section width. following information: Tire Markings, Tire Iden- The letter "P" is absent from this tire size Tire Markings tification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defi- designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. nitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based Safety Load on U.S. design standards. The size designa- Standards tion for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that Code (TIN) are molded into the sidewall preceding the 2 — Size 5 — Maximum size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Designation Pressure 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, • Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo- Description Traction and rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or Temperature “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the Grades size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 171 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Service Description: 95 = Load Index • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

172 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

173 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

174 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the: NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1. Number of people that can be carried in the on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of vehicle. the driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, includ- 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. ing the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, and inflate to the recommended pressure for rear, and spare tires. your vehicle. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading Tire And Loading Information Placard conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front Example Tire Placard Location (Door) and rear axles must not be exceeded. Tire And Loading Information Placard

175 To determine the maximum loading conditions (4) The resulting figure equals the avail- Metric Example For Load Limit of your vehicle, locate the statement “The com- able amount of cargo and luggage load For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg bined weight of occupants and cargo should capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- Loading Information placard. The combined gage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. tongue weight (if applicable) should never ex- amount of available cargo and luggage ceed the weight referenced here. load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 NOTE: (5x150) = 650 lbs.) Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your (1) Locate the statement “The com- (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The following table shows examples bined weight of occupants and cargo on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” vehicle. That weight may not safely ex- and towing capacities of your vehicle with on your vehicle's placard. ceed the available cargo and luggage varying seating configurations and number load capacity calculated in Step 4. and size of occupants. This table is for illus- (2) Determine the combined weight of tration purposes only and may not be accurate (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, for the seating and load carry capacity of your

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. load from your trailer will be transferred vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to • For the following example, the combined (3) Subtract the combined weight of the determine how this reduces the avail- weight of occupants and cargo should never driver and passengers from XXX kg or able cargo and luggage load capacity of exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). XXX lbs. your vehicle.

176 177 WARNING! Safety NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over- WARNING! cause erratic and unpredictable steering re- loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle sponse. handling, and increase your stopping dis- • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous tance. Use tires of the recommended load and can cause collisions. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may capacity for your vehicle. Never overload • Underinflation increases tire flexing and cause the vehicle to drift left or right. them. can result in overheating and tire failure. • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Fuel Economy Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling re- chuckholes can cause damage that result sistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tire Pressure in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can af- Tread Wear Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the fect vehicle handling and can fail sud- safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering pressure: resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- problems. You could lose control of your ment. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Safety and Vehicle Stability vehicle. • Economy • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort- • Tread Wear to drift to the right or left. • Ride Comfort • Always drive with each tire inflated to the able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and recommended cold tire inflation pressure. uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed feeling of sluggish response or over responsive- on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the ness in the steering. driver's side door. 178 At least once a month: Check tire pressures more often if subject to a hicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not pressures vary with temperature changes. recommended safe operating speeds, loading make a visual judgement when determining Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi and cold tire inflation pressures. proper inflation. Tires may look properly in- (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature flated even when they are under-inflated. change. Keep this in mind when checking tire WARNING! • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible pressure inside a garage, especially in the Win- damage. ter. High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) strain on your tires could cause them to fail. CAUTION! and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then You could have a serious collision. Do not the cold tire inflation pressure should be in- After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum ca- creased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. pacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside This will prevent moisture and dirt from en- (120 km/h). tering the valve stem, which could damage temperature condition. the valve stem. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to Radial Ply Tires 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this Inflation pressures specified on the placard are normal pressure build up or your tire pressure WARNING! always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire will be too low. inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure Combining radial ply tires with other types of after the vehicle has not been driven for at least Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) The manufacturer advocates driving at safe collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The speeds and within posted speed limits. Where four. Never combine them with other types of cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the speed limits or conditions are such that the tires. maximum inflation pressure molded into the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain- tire sidewall. ing correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve- 179 Tire Repair Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has WARNING! limited driving capabilities and needs to be If your tire becomes damaged, it may be re- replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu- paired if it meets the following criteria: repairable. ously when you are stuck, and do not let • The tire has not been driven on when flat. anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded what the speed. • The damage is only on the tread section of at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). the run flat mode. Tread Wear Indicators • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch See the tire pressure monitoring section for Tread wear indicators are in the original equip- (6 mm). more information. ment tires to help you in determining when your Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs tires should be replaced. Tire Spinning and additional information. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi- Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above have experienced a loss of pressure should be 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire continuously without stopping. of identical size and service description (Load SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Index and Speed Symbol). Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Tire Tread Run Flat Tires — If Equipped 1 — Worn Tire Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive WARNING! 2 — New Tire 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A cause tire damage or failure. A tire could These indicators are molded into the bottom of Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation explode and injure someone. Do not spin the tread grooves. They will appear as bands pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the 180 tread wear indicators, the tire should be re- WARNING! It is recommended to replace the two front tires placed. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire section for further information. control and have a collision resulting in seri- can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If ous injury or death. you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the Life Of Tire wheel’s specifications match those of the origi- Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with The service life of a tire is dependent upon nal wheels. as little exposure to light as possible. Protect varying factors including, but not limited to: tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. It is recommended you contact your authorized • Driving style. tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any Replacement Tires • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation questions you may have on tire specifications or pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance capability. Failure to use equivalent replace- develop across the tire tread. These abnormal of many characteristics. They should be in- ment tires may adversely affect the safety, han- wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire dling, and ride of your vehicle. in the need for earlier tire replacement. inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly • Distance driven. recommends that you use tires equivalent to the WARNING! originals in size, quality and performance when • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph speed rating other than that specified for reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Re- your vehicle. Some combinations of unap- the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly fer to the Tire and Loading Information placard proved tires and wheels may change sus- recommended. or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size pension dimensions and performance designation of your tire. The Load Index and characteristics, resulting in changes to Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the WARNING! steering, handling, and braking of your original equipment tire sidewall. Tires and the spare tire should be replaced vehicle. This can cause unpredictable han- after six years, regardless of the remaining See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the dling and stress to steering and suspension tread. Failure to follow this warning can re- “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual components. You could lose control and sult in sudden tire failure. You could lose for more information relating to the Load Index have a collision resulting in serious injury and Speed Symbol of a tire. 181 WARNING! Traction levels may vary between different all WARNING! season tires. All season tires can be identified or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi- with load ratings approved for your vehicle. the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets tions. You could lose vehicle control, result- • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the ing in severe injury or death. Driving too fast capacity, other than what was originally safety and handling of your vehicle. for conditions also creates the possibility of equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with loss of vehicle control. a smaller load index could result in tire Summer Or Three Season Tires — overloading and failure. You could lose If Equipped Snow Tires control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires Summer tires provide traction in both wet and Some areas of the country require the use of having adequate speed capability can re- dry conditions, and are not intended to be snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be sult in sudden tire failure and loss of ve- driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol hicle control. equipped with Summer tires, be aware these on the tire sidewall. tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving If you need snow tires, conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle CAUTION! select tires equivalent when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F in size and type to the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. Replacing original tires with tires of a differ- original equipment ent size may result in false speedometer and For more information, contact an authorized tires. Use snow tires odometer readings. dealer. only in sets of four; failure to do so may ad- Tire Types Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on versely affect the safety All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets and handling of your vehicle. of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). safety and handling of your vehicle. than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds 182 above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original CAUTION! Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the equipment or an authorized tire dealer for rec- letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. ommended safe operating speeds, loading and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Example: T145/80D18 103M. cold tire inflation pressures. not take your vehicle through an automatic T,S=Temporary Spare Tire car wash with a compact or limited use tem- While studded tires improve performance on porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle Since this tire has limited tread life, the original ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry may result. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) surfaces may be poorer than that of non- and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op- studded tires. Some states prohibit studded Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire portunity. tires; therefore, local laws should be checked And Wheel — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount before using these tire types. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the Spare Tires — If Equipped and wheel equivalent in look and function to the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one original equipment tire and wheel found on the Refer to the applicable section in the appropri- compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire ate chapter in the Owner’s Manual at any given time. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho- WARNING! nadian Residents) for further information. rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact and collapsible spares are for tem- For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit porary emergency use only. With these instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in your The compact spare is for temporary emergency Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the use only. You can identify if your vehicle is tread wear indicators, the temporary use owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for spare tire description on the Tire and Loading follow the warnings, which apply to your further information. Information Placard located on the driver’s side spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. 183 Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped WARNING! Limited Use Spare — If Equipped The collapsible spare is for temporary emer- The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Compact and Collapsible spares are for tem- gency use only. This tire is identified by a label porary emergency use only. With these equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at located on the limited use spare wheel. This spares, do not drive more than 50 mph the spare tire description on the Tire and Load- label contains the driving limitations for this (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- spare. This tire may look like the original ing Information Placard located on the driver’s ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited Collapsible spare tire description example: spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, 165/80-17 101P. follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare replace (or repair) the original equipment tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire failure and loss of vehicle control. and reinstall on the vehicle at the first equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) opportunity. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first op- Full Size Spare — If Equipped WARNING! portunity. The full size spare is for temporary emergency Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is use only. This tire may look like the originally Limited use spares are for emergency use

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your only. Installation of this limited use spare tire collapsible tire using the electric air pump be- vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the fore lowering the vehicle. limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is cold tire inflation pressures listed on your a conventional tire on the collapsible spare not the same as your original equipment tire, Tire and Loading Information Placard located wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically replace (or repair) the original equipment tire on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of for the collapsible spare tire. and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu- the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the nity. original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

184 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care NOTE: CAUTION! If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is an extended period after cleaning the wheels and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned recommended. with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water the brakes to remove the water droplets from the to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including brake components. This activity will remove the Wash wheels with the same soap solution rec- excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle ommended for the body of the vehicle. selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals vibration when braking. and equipment to prevent damage to the Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom- chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. CAUTION! dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh If your vehicle is equipped with these spe- chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the CAUTION! cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle from corroding and tarnishing. permanently damage this finish and such brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These damage is not covered by the New Vehicle products may damage the wheel's protective CAUTION! Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US- finish. Such damage is not covered by the ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash Avoid products or automatic car washes that CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi- that is required to maintain this finish. recommended. tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash

185 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Treadwear Traction Grades UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The Treadwear grade is a comparative The Traction grades, from highest to low- rating, based on the wear rate of the tire est, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades The following tire grading categories when tested under controlled conditions represent the tire's ability to stop on wet were established by the National High- on a specified government test course. pavement, as measured under con- way Traffic Safety Administration. The For example, a tire graded 150 would trolled conditions on specified govern- specific grade rating assigned by the wear one and one-half times as well on ment test surfaces of asphalt and con- tire's manufacturer in each category is the government course as a tire graded crete. A tire marked C may have poor shown on the sidewall of the tires on your 100. The relative performance of tires traction performance. vehicle. depends upon the actual conditions of All passenger vehicle tires must conform their use, however, and may depart sig- WARNING! to Federal safety requirements in addi- nificantly from the norm due to varia- The traction grade assigned to this tire tion to these grades. tions in driving habits, service practices, is based on straight-ahead braking and differences in road characteristics traction tests, and does not include SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and climate. acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

186 Temperature Grades WARNING! The Temperature grades are A (the high- The temperature grade for this tire is est), B, and C, representing the tire's established for a tire that is properly resistance to the generation of heat and inflated and not overloaded. Excessive its ability to dissipate heat, when tested speed, under-inflation, or excessive under controlled conditions on a speci- loading, either separately or in combi- fied indoor laboratory test wheel. nation, can cause heat buildup and Sustained high temperature can cause possible tire failure. the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

187 188 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .190 FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE ...... 192 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT...... 196 Torque Specifications ...... 190 FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ...... 193 Engine ...... 196 Chassis ...... 198 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ...... 191 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DODGE ...... 194 MOPAR ACCESSORIES...... 199 E-85 General Information ...... 191 Engine ...... 194 Chassis...... 196 Authentic Accessories By Mopar ...... 199

189 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE **Use only your authorized dealer recom- SPECIFICATIONS mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed loose particles. and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until torque wrench using a high quality six sided each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure (hex) deep wall socket. that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway). Torque Specifications NOTE: Base Model Vehicle If in doubt about the correct tightness, have Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ them checked with a torque wrench by your Torque Pattern

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Bolt Size Bolt Socket authorized dealer or service station. Size After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt WARNING! 130 Ft-Lbs M14x1.50 22mm torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are (176 N·m) To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the properly seated against the wheel. jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until SRT Model Vehicle the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol- Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ low this warning may result in personal in- Bolt Size Bolt Socket jury. Size 111 Ft-Lbs M14x1.50 22mm (150 N·m)

190 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) E-85 General Information The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.

191 FLUID CAPACITIES — DODGE U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engine (87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters 5.7L Engine (89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters 6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters 5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters 6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters Cooling System* 3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters 5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 15 Quarts 14.3 Liters 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/ 15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

192 FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 6.2L Supercharged Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters 6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 6.2L Supercharged Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters 6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters Cooling System * 6.2L Supercharged Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 6.2L Supercharged Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/ 15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters 150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

193 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DODGE Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Engine Oil – 3.6L/5.7L Engine Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils. Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol. Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol. Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol. Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.

194 CAUTION! CAUTION! • This vehicle has not been designed for use • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other with propylene glycol-based engine cool- than specified Organic Additive Technol- ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol- ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not result in engine damage and may decrease recommended. corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non- OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro- duced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti- rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

195 Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5). Rear Axle – 3.6/5.7 Engine We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). Rear Axle – 6.4L Engine We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032. Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.

196 CAUTION! CAUTION! • This vehicle has not been designed for use • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other with propylene glycol-based engine cool- than specified Organic Additive Technol- ant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol- ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not result in engine damage and may decrease recommended. corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non- OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is intro- duced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti- rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

197 Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 brake fluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir — If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-10838. Rear Axle We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

198 MOPAR ACCESSORIES • In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain • For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accesso- far more than expressive style, premium pro- ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or Authentic Accessories By Mopar tection, or extreme entertainment, you also online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and benefit from enhancing your vehicle with ac- mopar.ca for Canadian residents. • The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar featur- cessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved. NOTE: ing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically All parts are subject to availability. for your Dodge Charger.

EXTERIOR: • Rear Spoiler • Custom Wheels • Fog Lights • Trailer Hitch Receiver And Wire Harness • Graphics Packages • Molded Splash Guards

INTERIOR: • Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Slush Mats • Bright Pedal Kit • Door Sill Guards • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Katzkin Leather Interiors

ELECTRONICS: • Kicker Sound System • Uconnect Phone • Remote Start • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System (EVTS) • Mopar Connect

PERFORMANCE • Cold Air Intake • Performance Suspension • Anti Sway Bars • Scat Pack Performance Packages • Strut Tower Braces

• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc. 199 200 MULTIMEDIA

MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY ...... 203 SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED .....225 Taking A Detour ...... 239 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ...... 204 SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) ...... 239 (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) ...... 225 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 240 Uconnect 4 At A Glance ...... 204 SiriusXM Guardian Activation ...... 226 Personalized Menu Bar ...... 207 UCONNECT PHONE ...... 241 Download The Uconnect App ...... 227 Radio...... 208 Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Renewing Subscriptions Hands Free Calling) ...... 241 Android Auto ...... 210 (Uconnect 4C NAV)...... 227 Apple CarPlay Integration ...... 211 Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System . .243 Account ...... 227 UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH Common Phone Commands DISPLAY ...... 212 Built-In Features ...... 227 (Examples) ...... 246 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance .....212 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . . .230 Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone Personalized Menu Bar ...... 215 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL...... 232 During Call ...... 246 Radio...... 216 Transfer Ongoing Call Between NAVIGATION ...... 236 Android Auto ...... 218 Handset Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt And Vehicle ...... 246 Apple CarPlay Integration ...... 221 Volume ...... 236 Phonebook...... 246 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 223 Finding Points Of Interest ...... 238 Voice Command Tips ...... 246 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...... 225 Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . .238 Changing The Volume ...... 247 Left Switch ...... 225 One-Step Voice Destination Entry...... 238 Using Do Not Disturb ...... 247 Right Switch...... 225 Setting Your Home Location...... 238 Incoming Text Messages ...... 247 Home...... 238 Helpful Tips And Common Questions Adding A Stop...... 239 To Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect System ...... 248

201 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Phone ...... 252 Mobile App (4C NAV) ...... 254 QUICK TIPS ...... 249 Climate (4C/4C NAV)...... 252 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 255 Introducing Uconnect ...... 249 Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 253 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ...... 255 Get Started ...... 249 SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 256 Basic Voice Commands ...... 250 If Equipped ...... 253 General Information ...... 257 Radio...... 251 Register (4C NAV) ...... 254 Additional Information ...... 257

MULTIMEDIA Media ...... 251 Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) . . .254

202 CYBERSECURITY • To help further improve vehicle security and WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and • It is not possible to know or to predict all of breach, vehicle owners should: may be equipped with both wired and wireless the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s sys- – Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/ networks. These networks allow your vehicle to tems are breached. It may be possible that software-update to learn about available send and receive information. This information vehicle systems, including safety related Uconnect software updates. allows systems and features in your vehicle to systems, could be impaired or a loss of – Only connect and use trusted media de- function properly. vehicle control could occur that may result vices (e.g. personal mobile phones, in an accident involving serious injury or USBs, CDs). Your vehicle may be equipped with certain se- death. curity features to reduce the risk of unauthor- Privacy of any wireless and wired communica- • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or ized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and tions cannot be assured. Third parties may unlaw- CD) into your vehicle if it came from a wireless communications. Vehicle software fully intercept information and private communi- trusted source. Media of unknown origin technology continues to evolve over time and cations without your consent. For further could possibly contain malicious software, information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu- and if installed in your vehicle, it may in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your ates and takes appropriate steps as needed. increase the possibility for vehicle systems Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement and “On- Similar to a computer or other devices, your to be breached. board Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” vehicle may require software updates to im- • As always, if you experience unusual ve- in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in prove the usability and performance of your hicle behavior, take your vehicle to your your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau- nearest authorized dealer immediately. en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) systems. NOTE: for further information. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the directly regarding software updates. most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

203 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY Uconnect 4 At A Glance MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Screen

204 CAUTION! Setting The Time Audio Settings • For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then • Press of the “Audio” button on the touch- Do NOT attach any object to the touch- press the time display at the top of the screen. screen to activate the Audio settings screen to screen, doing so can result in damage to the Press “Yes.” adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed Ad- screen. • If the time is not displayed at the top of the justed Volume, Surround Sound, Loudness, screen, press the “Settings” button on the AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off NOTE: touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the With Door. Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur- “Time & Date” button on the touchscreen, • You can return to the Radio screen by pressing poses only and may not reflect exact software for then check or uncheck this option. the “X” located at the top right. your vehicle. • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Balance/Fade Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the • If these features are not available, uncheck touchscreen to Balance audio between the the Sync Time box. front speakers or fade the audio between the • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of rear and front speakers. the Clock Setting screen. • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.

205 Equalizer Speed Adjusted Volume AUX Volume Offset • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button • Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on the screen to activate the Equalizer screen. on the touchscreen to activate the Speed touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Off- • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted set screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted screen, or press and drag over the level bar for Volume is adjusted by pressing the volume by pressing of the “+” and “–” buttons. This each of the equalizer bands. The level value, level indicator. This alters the automatic ad- alters the AUX input audio volume. The level

MULTIMEDIA which spans between plus or minus nine, is justment of the audio volume with variation to value, which spans between plus or minus displayed at the bottom of each of the bands. vehicle speed. three, is displayed above the adjustment bar. Loudness Auto Play • Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to • Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch- activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and quality at lower volumes improves. “Off.” With Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected device, immediatley after it is connected to the radio

206 Personalized Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4 Main Menu 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App NOTE: screen. to replace an existing shortcut in the main This feature is only available if the vehicle is in menu bar. PARK. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.

207 Radio MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 6 — Seek Up 2 — Toggle Between Presets 7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 3 — Status Bar 8 — Seek Down 4 — Main Category Bar 9 — Browse And Manage Presets 5 — Audio Settings 10 — Radio Bands

208 WARNING! Seek Up/Seek Down Store Radio Presets Manually • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the the touchscreen for less than two seconds to 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They wheel. You have full responsibility and as- seek through radio stations. are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see sume all risks related to the use of the • Press and hold either arrow button on the the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser- touchscreen for more than two seconds to button on the touchscreen at the top right of the vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only bypass stations without stopping. The radio screen to toggle between the two sets of six use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard- will stop at the next listenable station once the presets. ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to arrow button on the touchscreen is released. do so may result in an accident involving To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps serious injury or death. Direct Tune below:

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the 1. Tune to the desired station. button on the touchscreen. “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button desired station number. on the touchscreen for more than two sec- Selecting Radio Stations onds or until you hear a confirmation beep. • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.

209 Android Auto 2. Connect your Android powered smartphone Once Android Auto is up and running on your to one of the media USB ports in your ve- Uconnect radio, the following features can be Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect hicle. If the Android Auto app was not down- utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or loaded, the first time you plug your device in, higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, • Google Maps for navigation the app will begin to download. that allows you to project your smartphone and • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio NOTE: for music MULTIMEDIA display. Android Auto automatically brings you Be sure to use the factory-provided USB • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi- useful information, and organizes it into simple cable that came with your phone, as after- cation cards that appear just when they are needed. market cables may not work. Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in- • Hundred of compatible apps class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio NOTE: faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area to control many of your apps. To use Android with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use Auto follow the following procedure: cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown 1. Download the Android Auto app from the in the upper right corner of the radio screen. Google Play store on your Android-powered smartphone.

Android Auto

3. Once the device is connected and recog- nized, Android Auto should automatically launch, but you can also launch it by touching the Android Auto icon on the touchscreen, located under Apps. Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage 210 Apple CarPlay Integration 2. Once the device is connected and recog- NOTE: nized, CarPlay should automatically launch, To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, but you can also launch it by touching the turned on, and that you are in an area with the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone CarPlay on the touchscreen, located under cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cover- in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use Apps. age is shown on the left side of the radio screen. your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more. To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure: 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- Once CarPlay is up and running on your ning cable that came with your phone, as Uconnect radio, the following features can be aftermarket cables may not work. utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: • Phone • Music • Messages • Maps

211 UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio Screen

212 WARNING! Setting The Time Background Themes • Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati- • Screen background themes are selectable ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the cally via GPS, so it should not require any time from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like wheel. You have full responsibility and as- adjustment. If you do need to set the time to set a theme, follow the instructions below. sume all risks related to the use of the manually, follow the instructions below for • Press the “Settings” button on the touch- Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser- Model 4C NAV. screen. vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only • For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then press use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard- • Press the “Display” button on the touch- the time display at the top of the screen. Press ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to screen. “Yes.” do so may result in an accident involving • Then press “Set Theme” button on the touch- serious injury or death. • If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen and select a theme. screen, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the Audio Settings CAUTION! “Clock” button on the touchscreen, then • Press of the “Audio” button on the touch- Do NOT attach any object to the touch- check or uncheck this option. screen to activate the Audio settings screen to screen, doing so can result in damage to the • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed screen. Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. Adjusted Volume. • If these features are not available, uncheck • You can return to the Radio screen by pressing NOTE: the Sync Time box. the “X” located at the top right. Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of your vehicle. the Clock Setting screen.

213 Balance/Fade Equalizer Speed Adjusted Volume • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button touchscreen to Balance audio between the screen to activate the Equalizer screen. on the touchscreen to activate the Speed front speakers or fade the audio between the • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted rear and front speakers. screen, or press and drag over the level bar for Volume is adjusted by pressing the volume • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or each of the equalizer bands. The level value, level indicator. This alters the automatic ad- MULTIMEDIA “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press which spans between plus or minus nine, is justment of the audio volume with variation to and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. vehicle speed. Balance/Fade.

214 Personalized Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App NOTE: screen. to replace an existing shortcut in the main This feature is only available if the vehicle is in menu bar. PARK. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.

215 Radio MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings 2 — Toggle Between Presets 8 — Seek Up 3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down 5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets 6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands

216 WARNING! Seek Up/Seek Down To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on below: ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the the touchscreen for less than two seconds to 1. Tune to the desired station. wheel. You have full responsibility and as- seek through radio stations. 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button sume all risks related to the use of the • Press and hold either arrow button on the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser- on the touchscreen for more than two sec- touchscreen for more than two seconds to vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only onds or until you hear a confirmation beep. bypass stations without stopping. The radio use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard- will stop at the next listenable station once the HD Radio — If Equipped ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to arrow button on the touchscreen is released. • HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV) do so may result in an accident involving operates similar to conventional radio except serious injury or death. Direct Tune it allows broadcasters to transmit a high- • To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the quality digital signal. “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the button on the touchscreen. • With an HD radio receiver, the listener is desired station number. Selecting Radio Stations provided with a clear sound that enhances the Store Radio Presets Manually listening experience. HD radio can also trans- • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) mit data such as song title or artist. button on the touchscreen. Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between the two sets of six presets.

217 Android Auto 2. Connect your Android powered smartphone 3. Once the device is connected, the system to one of the media USB ports in your ve- will display the Android Auto home screen. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect hicle. If the Android Auto app was not down- Android Auto should automatically launch, system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or loaded, the first time you plug your device in, but if it does not launch automatically, refer higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, the app will begin to download. to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple- that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio NOTE: ment for the procedure to enable the feature

MULTIMEDIA display. Android Auto automatically brings you Be sure to use the factory-provided USB “AutoShow.” You can also launch it by useful information, and organizes it into simple cable that came with your phone, as after- pressing Android Auto located in the “Apps” cards that appear just when they are needed. market cables may not work. menu. If you use Android Auto frequently Android Auto can be used with Google's best-in- you can move the app to the menu bar at the class speech technology, the steering wheel bottom of the touchscreen. Press the controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio “Apps” button and locate the Android Auto faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen app; then press and drag the selected App to to control many of your apps. To use Android replace an existing shortcut in the main Auto follow the following procedure: menu bar. 1. Download the Android Auto app from the Once Android Auto is up and running on your Google Play store on your Android-powered Uconnect radio, the following features can be smartphone. utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: • Google Maps for navigation Android Auto • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication • Hundred of compatible apps

218 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, If you are using the native Uconnect navigation area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may the native Uconnect VR will prompt you and any system, and you try and start a new route using use cellular data and your cellular coverage is navigation command said will launch the native the Android Auto, via voice or any other method, shown in the upper right corner of the radio Uconnect navigation system. a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to screen. switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone While using Android Auto, Google Maps navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if provides voice-guided: you’d like to switch, if Android Auto is currently • Navigation in use and you attempt to launch a native • Live traffic information Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation type to the newly used method of • Lane guidance navigation and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged. For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/. Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage For further information on the navigation Maps function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android or Push and hold the VR button on the steering https://support.google.com/androidauto/. wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google Google Maps to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto to access Google Maps.

219 Music NOTE: To see the metadata for the music playing Android Auto allows you to access and stream through Android Auto, select the Uconnect your favorite music with apps like Google Play System’s media screen. Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless For further information refer to music on the road. https://support.google.com/androidauto. MULTIMEDIA NOTE: Communication Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set With Android Auto connected, press and hold up on your smartphone prior to using Android the VR button on the steering wheel to activate Auto, for them to work with Android Auto. voice recognition specific to the Android Auto. Android Auto Phone This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read Apps out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls. The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto. Android Auto Music

Android Auto Contact 220 Apple CarPlay Integration 2. Once the device is connected, the system Once CarPlay is up and running on your will display the CarPlay home screen. Apple Uconnect radio, the following features can be Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, CarPlay should automatically launch, but if utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone it does not launch automatically, refer to the in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use • Phone Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehi- • Music cle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri the procedure to enable the feature “Au- to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, toShow.” You can also launch it by pressing • Messages and more. the CarPlay located in the “Apps” menu. If • Maps you use Apple CarPlay frequently you can To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone move the app to the menu bar at the bottom NOTE: 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure of the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is your iPhone is unlocked for the very first con- and locate the CarPlay app; then press and turned on, and that you are in an area with nection only, and then use the following proce- drag the selected App to replace an existing cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cover- dure: shortcut in the main menu bar. age is shown on the left side of the radio screen. 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- ning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

221 Phone Music Maps With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recog- playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push nition session. You can also press and hold the iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select third and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to Home button within CarPlay to start talking to party audio apps including music, news, sports, use Siri to set your desired destination. Alterna- Siri. This will allow you to make calls or listen to podcasts and more. tively, choose a Nearby destination by pressing

MULTIMEDIA voice mail as you normally would using Siri on Destinations and selecting a category, by your iPhone. launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by typing in a destination. NOTE: Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel will launch a native VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay.

Apple Music

Messages Maps Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but driver’s will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice.

222 NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS • If the VR button is not held, and is only The Uconnect system allows you to access Cus- pushed, the native Uconnect VR will prompt tomer Programmable feature settings such as you and any navigation command said will Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving launch the native Uconnect navigation sys- Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On tem. Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ • If you are using the native Uconnect naviga- Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, tion system, and you try and start a new route Clear Personal Data, System Information, and using CarPlay, via voice or any other method, a Compass Settings (if equipped) through buttons pop-up will appear asking if you would like to Navigation Pop-Up on the touchscreen. switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone NOTE: navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if Apps If equipped with the Super Track Pak option you’d like to switch, if an CarPlay navigation is To use a compatible app with CarPlay, you must please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” currently in use and you attempt to launch a have the compatible app downloaded, and you for further descriptions of these modes. native Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” will must be signed in to the app. Refer to http:// • Press the “Controls” button located near the switch the navigation type to the newly used www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents) or bottom of the touchscreen, then press the method of navigation and a route will be https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Cana- “Settings” button on the touchscreen to ac- planned for the new destination. If “No” is dian Residents) to see the latest list of available cess the Settings screen. When making a selected the navigation type will remain apps for CarPlay. selection, scroll up or down until the preferred unchanged. setting is highlighted, then press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

223 The following feature settings are available: • Display • Engine Off Options • Units • Audio • Voice • Phone/Bluetooth • Clock • SiriusXM Setup • Safety & Driving Assistance • Restore Settings

MULTIMEDIA • Lights • Clear Personal Data • Doors & Locks • System Information • Auto-On Comfort • Compass (if equipped)

Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Pro- grammable Features” found within “Multime- dia” located in your Owner's Manual. Visit www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information.

224 STEERING WHEEL Right Switch SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and driving experience. When connected to an • Push the switch up or down to increase or AUDIO CONTROLS operable network, you can: decrease the volume. The steering wheel audio controls are located on • Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian • Push the button in the center to change the rear surface of the steering wheel. operator who can connect you to emergency modes AM/FM/SAT. responders. SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — • Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the IF EQUIPPED SiriusXM Guardian App from your device. You can also do so by logging into your owner site, SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) your vehicle has an operable network connection. Services can only be used where cover- WARNING! age is available.

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention • Receive text or email notifications if your ve- Steering Wheel Audio Controls to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hicle's security alarm goes off. hands on the steering wheel. You have full • Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS Left Switch responsibility and assume all risks related to technology to help authorities locate your ve- • Push the switch up or down to search for the the use of the features and applications in hicle if it is stolen. this vehicle. Only use the features and appli- next listenable station. • Get operator assistance using the ASSIST but- cations when it is safe to do so. Failure to do ton on your interior rearview mirror. • Push the button in the center to select the so may result in an accident involving serious next preset station. injury or death.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. 225 Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the Included Trial Period For New Vehicles Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services. Here are just a few examples of things you’ll be Your new vehicle may come with an included able to do: 1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are lo- trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian cated on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST services starting at the date of vehicle purchase • Know that help, if you need it, is only a button button is used for contacting Roadside As- (date based on vehicle sales notification from press away with Assist. sistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first • Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hun- MULTIMEDIA Care, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call register with SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial dreds of miles away. button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM Care Agent, who can connect you to emer- • Find your vehicle, no matter where you Guardian services you can choose to purchase a gency services. parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder subscription. function. 2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is located • Use Send & Go to send a navigation route in the center of the menu bar of the radio SiriusXM Guardian Activation from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s navi- touchscreen. This is where you can manage To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard- gation system. your Apps. ian in your vehicle, you must activate your For further information:. 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and SiriusXM Guardian services. Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the • U.S. residents visit: 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your left side of your steering wheel. These but- www.siriusxm.com/guardian in-vehicle touchscreen. tons let you use your voice to give com- • Canadian residents visit: mands, make phone calls, send and receive 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca text messages hands-free, enter navigation list of apps. destinations, and control your radio and me- 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a dia devices. SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.

226 Download The Uconnect App • Log in to the app using the email address and Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian password you created when you activated the Account You’re only a few steps away from using remote services. commands and other valuable services. Selling Your Vehicle • Press the “Remote” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that Start (if equipped), and activate your horn and you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account lights remotely. information from the vehicle. You can do this by • Press the “Location” button on the bottom pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and menu bar of the app to bring up a map to selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call: locate your vehicle or send a location to your • U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827 vehicle’s navigation system. • Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091 • Press the menu button (three horizontal lines) in the upper left corner of the app to access Built-In Features settings and support information. Renewing Subscriptions WARNING! (Uconnect 4C NAV) ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Mobile App Subscriptions can be purchased online by log- wheel. You have full responsibility and as- ging into your owner account. If you need help sume all risks related to the use of the To use the Uconnect App: push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian ser- • Search for and download the Uconnect app then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or: vices, and applications in this vehicle. Only from the store on your compatible iPhone or use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guard- • U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827 Android powered device. ian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to • Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091 do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

227 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger • ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- rized by the subscriber. (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous tion to the road. Some features are limited 1. ASSIST Call (4C NAV) — The rearview mirror road conditions or location), do not wait for while the vehicle is in motion. Some ser- contains an ASSIST button, allowing you to voice contact from a SOS Call operator. All vices, including SOS, will NOT work with- speak to a call center agent for support: occupants should exit the vehicle immedi-

MULTIMEDIA out a subscription and an operable net- ately and move to a safe location. work connection. • The SOS Call system is embedded into the • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add af- mean you may not have SOS Call service if termarket electrical equipment to the ve- needed. If the rearview mirror light is illu- hicle’s electrical system. This may prevent minated, have an authorized dealer service your vehicle from sending a signal to initi- the SOS Call system immediately. • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) ate an emergency call. To avoid interfer- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the ence that can cause the SOS Call system instrument panel if a malfunction is de- to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data tected in any part of the airbag system. If SOS Call Button And ASSIST the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical the air bag system may not be working system or modify the antennas on your 1 — SOS Call Button properly and the SOS Call system may not vehicle. 2 — ASSIST Button • IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Light is illuminated, have an authorized Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM dealer service your vehicle immediately. Guardian services, among others, will not operate.

228 • Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a 2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The The Emergency services operator may, like flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con- rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button any other emergency call, record conversa- nected to someone who can help any- that, when pressed, may place a call from tions and sounds in and near your vehicle time. Additional fees may apply. Addi- your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian Care upon connection. tional information in this section. operator, who can connect you to emergency 3. Theft Alarm Notification — The Theft Alarm service operators, to request help from local • Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for Notification feature notifies you via email or police, fire or ambulance personnel. If this Uconnect Apps and Features. text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s button is accidentally pressed, you will have factory-installed security alarm system has • SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle ten seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press been set-off. There are a number of reasons support for SiriusXM Guardian services. the SOS Call button again or press the “Can- why your alarm may have been triggered, one • Vehicle Care — Total support for your cel” button shown on the touchscreen. After of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the details of the FCA US LLC vehicle. ten seconds has passed, the SOS call will be placed and only the SOS Call operator can Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. NOTE: cancel it. The LED light on the rearview When you activate, Theft Alarm Notification In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services mirror will turn green once a connection to a is automatically set to send you an email at to you, we may record and monitor your conver- SOS Call operator has been made. The green the email address you provide should the sations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect LED light will turn off once the SOS Call is alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care, terminated. Have an authorized dealer ser- message sent to your device. whether such conversations are initiated vice the vehicle if the rearview mirror light is 4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle through the SiriusXM Guardian services in your continuously red. On equipped vehicles, this is stolen, contact local law enforcement im- vehicle, your device, or via a landline device, feature requires a functioning electrical sys- mediately to file a stolen vehicle report. and may share information obtained through tem, a subscription, and an operable net- Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM such recording and monitoring in accordance work connection. If a connection is made Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle. with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, between a SOS Call operator and your ve- The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask agree, and consent to any recording, monitoring hicle, you understand and agree that SOS for the stolen vehicle report number issued or sharing of information obtained through any Call operators will stay on the line, even by local law enforcement. As long as your such call recordings. after you connect with emergency services. vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscrip- 229 tion and an operable network connection, d. Open the web browser on your portable You can download the App from Mopar Owner the agent may be able to locate the stolen device and enter the following web ad- Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or vehicle and work with law enforcement to dress: www.att.com/myvehicleaccount. Google Play Store (Android). Visit help recover it. Your vehicle must have an e. Create a myVehicle account or log in to UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de- operable network connection and must be your existing one. vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus- registered with SiriusXM Guardian with an tomer support and to determine if your device is f. Select and purchase the desired sub-

MULTIMEDIA active subscription that includes the appli- compatible. cable feature. scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot will activate after a few minutes. U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com 5. 4G Wi—Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows or call 1-877-855-8400. you and your passengers to connect their For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus- Canadian residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi tomer Care at: 866-595-1330 or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) capabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur- NOTE: or call:1-800-387-9983 (French). chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use of Your vehicle must have a working electrical an Internet-enabled portable device. system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM Guard- Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature pro- a. Select Wi-Fi Hotspot located under the ian services to operate. vides the ability to start the engine on your Uconnect “Apps” menu. vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features distance. You can send a request to your vehicle b. Select the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot option in one of two ways: from the touchscreen to locate your If you own a compatible iPhone or Android Hotspot Name and Password. powered device, the Uconnect App allows you 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your device. c. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings engine or activate your horn and lights from 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. menu, select the Hotspot Name from the virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be list of available networks and enter the equipped with remote start, must have a provided Password. SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and must have an operable network connection. Services can only be used where coverage is available. 230 • After 15 minutes if you have not entered Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature pro- Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a your vehicle with the key, the engine will vides the ability to lock or unlock the door on vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area shut off automatically. your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually by activating the horn and lights. It may also any distance. You can send a request to your help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle • You can also send a command to turn-off vehicle in one of three ways: for any reason. You can send a request to your an engine that has been remote started. vehicle in one of three ways: 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible • This remote function requires your ve- device. 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible hicle to be equipped with a factory- device. installed Remote Start system. To utilize 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. this feature after the Uconnect App is 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care downloaded, login with your user name on the phone. and password. on the phone. To use this feature after the Uconnect App is To use this feature after the Uconnect App is To use this feature after the Uconncet App is downloaded, login using your user name and downloaded, login using your user name and downloaded, login using your user name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request. Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request. Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect You can set-up notifications for your account to Press the “remote start” icon on your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and press the “open lock” receive an email or text (SMS) message every App to remotely start the vehicle. icon to unlock the driver’s door. time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner You can set-up notifications for your account to You can set-up notifications for your account to Connect at moparownerconnect.com and click receive an email or text (SMS) message every receive an email or text (SMS) message every on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Notifications. Connect at moparownerconnect.com and click Connect at moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications. Notifications.

231 Vehicle Finder Send & Go AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile Mobile App allows you to find the location of App allows you to search for a destination on your vehicle when you can't remember where your mobile device and then send the route to it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and your vehicle’s Uconnect Navigation system. flash the lights to make finding your vehicle To send a navigation route to your vehicle: MULTIMEDIA even easier. 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect To find your vehicle: Mobile App bottom bar. 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect 2. Either type in the destination you would like Mobile App bottom bar. to navigate to, or search through one of the 2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the categories provided. location of your vehicle. 3. Select the destination you want to route to 3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap- from the list that appears. pears, once your vehicle is located. 4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and 4. Select your preferred Navigation App to then confirm the destination by pressing Uconnect Media Hub route a path to your vehicle. “Yes,” to send the navigation route to the 1 — USB Port One Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. 2 — Audio/AUX Jack 5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle 3 — USB Port Two by pressing the “Go Now” option on the pop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started. There are many ways to play music from MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle's sound system. Press your Media button on the touchscreen to begin.

232 Audio Jack (AUX) • When connected, the compatible USB device Bluetooth Streaming Audio can be controlled using the radio or Steering • The AUX allows a device to be plugged into • If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound sys- your Bluetooth-equipped device may also be or previous track, browse, and list the con- tem, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify able to stream music to your vehicle's sound tents. the source and play through the vehicle speak- system. Your connected device must be ers. • The battery charges when plugged into the Bluetooth-compatible and paired with your USB port (if supported by the specific device). system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing in- • Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch- structions). You can access the music from screen will change the mode to auxiliary de- • To route the USB cable out of the center your connected Bluetooth device by pressing vice if the audio jack is connected, allowing console, use the access cut out. the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the music from your device to be heard NOTE: while in Media mode. through the vehicle's speakers. To activate the When connecting your device for the first time, AUX, plug in the audio jack. the system may take several minutes to read • The functions of the device are controlled your music, depending on the number of files. using the device buttons. The volume may be For example, the system will take approximately controlled using the radio or device. five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on • To route the audio cable out of the center the device. Also during the reading process, the console, use the access cut out in the front of Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. the console. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it USB Port is connected. After the first time, the reading • Connect your compatible device using a USB process of your device will take considerably cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks less time unless changes are made or new songs with audio files can also be used. Audio from are added to the playlist. the device can be played on the vehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display. 233 Media Controls MULTIMEDIA

Media Controls 1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played 2 — Music Track And Time 6 — Browse Music By 3 — Shuffle Music Tracks 7 — Music Source 4 — Music Track Information

234 Media Controls 1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played 2 — Music Track And Time 6 — Browse Music By 3 — Shuffle Music Tracks 7 — Music Source 4 — Music Track Information

235 The controls are accessed by pressing the de- NAVIGATION Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt sired button on the touchscreen and choosing Volume between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth. • The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume NOTE: system or the Navigation has been activated 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch- Uconnect will automatically switch to the ap- on your Uconnect 4C with 8.4–inch display screen in the lower right area of the screen. propriate mode when something is first con- system.

MULTIMEDIA nected or inserted into the system. 2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in button on the touchscreen. the menu bar to access the Navigation system. 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Vol- ume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

236 Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation 1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories 5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination 2 — Find A Destination 6 — Navigation Settings 3 — View Map 7 — Emergency 4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination 8 — Information

237 Finding Points Of Interest One-Step Voice Destination Entry Setting Your Home Location • From the main Navigation menu, press the • Enter a navigation destination without taking • Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then your hands off the wheel. the menu bar to access the Navigation system press the “Points of Interest” button on the • Just push the Uconnect Voice Command and the Main Navigation menu. touchscreen. button on the steering wheel, wait for • Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. • Select a category and then a subcategory, if the beep and say something like, "Find Ad- MULTIMEDIA necessary. dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI." • You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, or • Select your destination and press the “GO!” NOTE: choose from recently found locations. button on the touchscreen. Destination entry is not available while your • To delete your Home location (or other saved vehicle is in motion. However, you can also use Finding A Place By Spelling The Name locations) so you can save a new Home loca- Voice Commands to enter an address while tion, press the “Home” button on the touch- • From the Main Navigation Menu press the moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Recognition screen, and in the “GO!” screen press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen, press Quick Tips” in this section for further “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the the “Points of Interest” button on the touch- information. screen, then press the “Spell Name” button Options menu press the “Clear Home” button on the touchscreen. on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by following the previous instructions. • Enter the name of your destination. • Press the “List” button on the touchscreen. Home • Select your destination and press the “GO!” • A Home location must be saved in the system. button on the touchscreen. From the Main Navigation menu, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.

238 Adding A Stop SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) • To add a stop you must be navigating a route. Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It. • Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen Avoid congestion before you reach it. By en- to return to the Main Navigation menu. hancing your vehicle's navigation system with • Press the “Where To?” button on the touch- the ability to see detailed traffic information, screen, then search for the extra stop. When you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine another location has been selected, you can average traffic speed and estimate travel time choose to cancel your previous route, add as along your route. Since the service is integrated the first destination or add as the last destina- with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Uconnect 4C NAV Map tion. Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest 1 — Distance To Next Turn • Press the desired selection and press the route based on traffic conditions. 2 — Next Turn Street “GO!” button on the touchscreen. • Detailed information on traffic speed, acci- 3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival dents, construction, and road closings. 4 — Zoom In And Out Taking A Detour • Traffic information from multiple sources, in- 5 — Your Location On The Map • To take a detour you must be navigating a cluding police and emergency services, cam- 6 — Navigation Main Menu route. eras and road sensors. 7 — Current Street Location 8 — Navigation Routing Options • Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen. • Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information. NOTE: • View conditions for points along your route If the route you are currently taking is the only and beyond. Available in over 130 markets. Your route is marked with a blue line on the reasonable option, the device may not calculate map. If you depart from the original route, your a detour. For more information, see your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon could Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement. appear as you travel on major roadways.

239 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you In addition to delivering over 130 channels of start your vehicle, Travel Link information ar- the best sports, entertainment, talk, and rives and updates in the background. You can commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre- access the information whenever you like, with mium data services that work in conjunction no waiting. with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM

MULTIMEDIA Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” into your vehicle and right to your fingertips. button on the touchscreen, then press the “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch- • Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel screen. prices in your area and route to the station of your choice. NOTE: • Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, and listings in your area and route to the sold separately after the trial subscription in- theater of your choice. cluded with your vehicle purchase. • Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules. • Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps to current and 5-day forecast.

240 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

Uconnect 4 Phone Menu 1 — Favorite Contacts 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains SOS Call) 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 13 — End Call 4 — Siri 14 — Call/Redial/Hold 5 — Mute Microphone 15 — Do Not Disturb 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 16 — Reply with Text Message 7 — Conference Call* * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 8 — Phone Settings ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 9 — Text Messaging** (requires Bluetooth MAP profile) 10 — Direct Dial Pad

241 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 12 — Favorite Contacts 3 — Do Not Disturb 13 — Mute Microphone 4 — Reply with Text Message 14 — Decline Incoming Call 5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name 15 — Answer/Redial/Hold 6 — Conference Call* 16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 7 — Phone Pairing 17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 8 — Text Messaging Menu** * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 9 — Direct Dial Pad ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones 10 — Contact Menu (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

242 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio place and receive hands-free mobile phone Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System Uconnect 4: calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons on the Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab- lishing a wireless connection between a cellular touchscreen (see Voice Command section). phone and the Uconnect system. The hands-free calling feature is made possible NOTE: through Bluetooth technology — the global standard that enables different electronic de- • To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first vices to connect to each other wirelessly. must determine if your mobile phone and software are compatible with the Uconnect If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on system. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for your steering wheel, you then have the complete mobile phone compatibility infor- Uconnect Phone features. mation. Uconnect 4 NOTE: • Mobile phone pairing is not available while the 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. vehicle is in motion. • The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone 2. Press the “Phone” button. equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Pro- • A maximum of ten mobile phones can be 3. Select “Settings.” file, Version 1.0 or higher. paired to the Uconnect system. 4. Select “Paired Phones.” • Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some mo- 5. Select “Add device.” bile phones/devices may not be equipped with • Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog- all of the required features to utilize all of the ress” screen while the system is Uconnect system features. connecting. • For Uconnect Customer Care: U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. 243 Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV: Pair Your iPhone: Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure: MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV Pairing Request

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. 1. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device Phone. on the touchscreen. To search for available devices on your 3. Select “Pairing.” NOTE: Bluetooth enabled iPhone: Some mobile phones will require you to 4. Select “Paired Phones.” 1. Press the Settings button. enter the PIN number. 5. Select “Add device.” 2. Select Bluetooth. Select The iPhone's Priority Level • Uconnect Phone will display an “In prog- • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. ress” screen while the system is When the pairing process has successfully com- Once enabled, the mobile phone will be- connecting. pleted, the system will prompt you to choose gin to search for Bluetooth connections. whether or not this is your favorite mobile 3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile system, select “Uconnect”. phone the highest priority. This mobile phone 244 will take precedence over other paired mobile To search for available devices on your Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: phones within range and will connect to the Bluetooth enabled Android Device: Uconnect system automatically when entering 1. Push the Menu button. the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the 2. Select Settings. Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, 3. Select Connections. simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.” phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Bluetooth device. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. Pair Your Android Device: 5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. • You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check Pairing Request “Do Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you 1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile can make calls by saying the name of phone matches the passkey shown on the your contact. Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth pairing request. NOTE: Uconnect Device Some mobile phones require the PIN to be entered manually, enter the PIN number shown on the Uconnect screen.

245 Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level Common Phone Commands (Examples) is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings on your phone. Some When the pairing process has successfully com- • “Call John Smith” pleted, the system will prompt you to choose phones require you to enable this feature manu- • “Call John Smith mobile” whether or not this is your favorite mobile ally. phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile • “Dial 1 248 555 1212” • Your phonebook can be browsed on the phone the highest priority. This mobile phone • “Redial” Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing

MULTIMEDIA will take precedence over other paired mobile can only be done on your phone. To browse, phones within range and will connect to the Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, Uconnect system automatically when entering • During a call, press the “Mute” button on the then the “Phonebook” button on the the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Phone main screen to mute and unmute the touchscreen. Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the call. Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are shown at the top of the main phone screen. phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the And Vehicle Uconnect system will reconnect to the Voice Command Tips Bluetooth device. • During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to transfer • Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe You are now ready to make hands-free calls. an on-going call between handset and vehicle. vs. Call John) will result in greater system Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on accuracy. your steering wheel to begin. Phonebook • You can “link” commands together for faster NOTE: The Uconnect system will automatically sync results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for ex- Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for addi- your phonebook from your paired phone, if this ample. tional information on mobile phone pairing and feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook for a list of compatible phones. contacts are updated each time that the phone

246 • If you are listening to available voice com- Using Do Not Disturb • Reply with text message is not compatible mand options, you do not have to listen to the with iPhones. entire list. When you hear the command that With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica- • Auto reply with text message is only available you need, push the button on the tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on command. the wheel. For your convenience, there is a Incoming Text Messages counter display to keep track of your missed Changing The Volume calls and text messages while you were using Do After pairing your Uconnect system with a • Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button Not Disturb. Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Mes- , then say a command. For example, sage Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect sys- Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a "Help". tem can announce a new incoming text mes- text message, a call or both, when declining an sage and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio • Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to incoming call and send it to voicemail. adjust the volume to a comfortable level while system. the Uconnect system is speaking. Automatic reply messages can be: NOTE: NOTE: • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you Only incoming text messages received during The volume setting for Uconnect is different shortly.” the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read. than the audio system. • Create a custom auto reply message up to To enable incoming text messaging: NOTE: 160 characters. iPhone To access help, push the Uconnect Phone but- While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be ton (if active) on the steering wheel and selected so you can still place a second call 1. Press the settings button on the mobile say "help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup without being interrupted by incoming calls. phone. button (if active) or the VR button (if 2. Select Bluetooth. active) and say "cancel" to cancel the help NOTE: • Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the session. • Only the beginning of your custom message mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect will be seen on the touchscreen. system. 247 3. Select located under DEVICES next to 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. NOTE: Uconnect. All incoming text messages received during the • A pop up will appear asking you to accept current ignition cycle will be deleted from the 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. a request for permission to connect to Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” the OFF position. and press OK. Helpful Tips And Common Questions MULTIMEDIA To Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect System Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing: • Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings (Blackberry devices). • Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions. Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages • Many mobile phones do not automatically Android Devices reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot). Enable Android Device Incoming Your mobile phone can still be connected 1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone. Text Messages manually. Close all applications that may be 2. Select Settings. operating (refer to mobile phone manufactur- 3. Select Connections. er’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wire- lessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.

248 Mobile Phone won’t pair to system: Can’t make a conference call: Get Started • Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by • CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carri- All you need to control your Uconnect system removing the battery (if removable — see your ers do not support conference calling. Refer to with your voice are the buttons on your steering mobile phone’s owner manual). your mobile phone user’s manual for further wheel. • Delete pairing history in mobile phone and information. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s Making calls while connected to AUX: Bluetooth connection settings. device and feature compatibility and to find • Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while phone pairing instructions. • Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands- discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and phone. Free Calling. Do not make calls while your passenger conversations are examples of mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack. noise that may impact recognition. • If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000. UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone Mobile Phonebook didn’t download: QUICK TIPS is located in the headliner and aimed at the • Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the driver. “phonebook download” request on your mo- Introducing Uconnect bile phone. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with must first push either the VR or Phone but- • Up to 5,000 contact names with four num- these helpful quick tips. It provides the key ton, wait until after the beep, then say your bers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect Voice Commands and tips you need to know to 4C/4C NAV system phonebook. Voice Command. control your Uconnect system. • Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers 5. You can interrupt the help message or sys- per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4 If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in tem prompts by pushing the VR or Phone system phonebook. the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have button and saying a Voice Command from the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a current category. Uconnect 4C system.

249 2. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for a few seconds, then release the VR button for Siri functions. After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a command. Phone Hang Up Button, Push to end a call.

MULTIMEDIA Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons Uconnect 4 Push the VR button . After the beep, 1 — Uconnect Phone Button say… 2 — Uconnect Voice Recognition Button 3 — Phone Hang Up Button • Cancel to stop a current voice session • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Com- mands Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call. • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Uconnect Voice Recognition Button . Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear 1. Short Press: Push and release the VR button on the top of the touchscreen. to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation, and Uconnect 4C/4C NAV other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say a command.

250 Radio • Change source to USB Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Sat- Classical ellite Radio trial required.) TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch- Push the VR button . After the beep, say… screen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM exactly how the artist, album, song and genre • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 information is displayed. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the Media VR button and say “Help.” The system Uconnect offers connections via USB, will provide you with a list of commands. Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose Uconnect 4 Media an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth • Change source to AUX Uconnect 4 Radio

251 • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) • Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then

MULTIMEDIA pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is Climate (4C/4C NAV) easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook but- Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures ton is illuminated on your touchscreen, your hands-free and keep everyone comfortable system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc- equipped with climate control.) tions. Push the VR button . After the beep, say Push the Phone button . After the beep, one of the following commands: say one of the following commands… Uconnect 4 Phone • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees • Call John Smith • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

252 TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — used to adjust the interior temperature of your . After the beep, say: If Equipped vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust • For the 4C Uconnect System, say: “Enter the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. state.” CAUTION! • For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say: Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will Hills, Michigan.” NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection 2. Then follow the system prompts. compatible with your device. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button NOTE: . After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- shop.” rized by the subscriber. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate An included trial and/or subscription is required Navigation (4C NAV) to take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next section of this guide. To The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps time and become more productive when you button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touch- know exactly how to get to where you want to go. screen to get started. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 4C system.) NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on Uconnect 4C NAV With equipped vehicles purchased within the conti- 8.4–inch Display Navigation nental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. 253 SOS Call 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your Mobile App (4C NAV) list of apps. Theft Alarm Notification You’re only a few steps away from using remote 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a Remote Door Lock/Unlock commands. SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent Send & Go who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web. Vehicle Finder MULTIMEDIA • U.S. residents visit: Stolen Vehicle Assistance www.siriusxm.com/guardian. Remote Vehicle Start** • Canadian residents visit: Remote Horn & Lights www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca. Roadside Assistance Call Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) Vehicle Health Reports** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email Vehicle Health Alert** report, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on Performance Pages Plus** top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if you •**If vehicle is equipped. are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your ve- Mobile App hicle will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts To use the Uconnect App: Register (4C NAV) when it detects issues with its key systems that • Download the Uconnect App to your mobile To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guard- need your attention. For further information go device. ian in your vehicle, you must activate your to the Owner Site website at www.mopar.com SiriusXM Guardian services. (U.S. residents) or www.Chrysler.ca (Canadian • Press the Info button on the navigation bar at Residents). the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.

254 • Press the Remote button on the navigation bar Push the VR button . After the beep, say Apple CarPlay — If Equipped at the bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, one of the following commands: Remote Start, and activate your horn and Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to • Show fuel prices lights remotely. interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice • Show 5 - day weather forecast recognition system, and use your smartphone’s • Press the Location button on the navigation data plan to project your iPhone and a number bar at the bottom of the app to bring up a map • Show extended weather to locate your vehicle or send a location to your of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice vehicle’s navigation system. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the Command. media USB ports, using the factory-provided • Press the Settings button in the upper left Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon corner of the app to bring up app settings and that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main access the Assist Call Centers. menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and NOTE: hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or For further information please visit press and hold the “Home” button within Apple DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natu- DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). ral voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) features: • Phone Need to find a gas station, view local movie SiriusXM Travel Link listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day • Music weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite • Messages of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not • Maps available for 4C system.) • Additional Apps

255 Android Auto — If Equipped Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart- MULTIMEDIA phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features: • Maps • Music Android Auto On 7-inch Display Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display • Phone • Text Messages Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information. • Additional Apps

256 General Information Additional Information The following regulatory statement applies to all © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this and Uconnect are registered trademarks and vehicle: Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Uconnect System Support: 1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display ence, and 7 days a week) 2. This device must accept any interference Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca received, including interference that may Supplement for further information. or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) cause undesired operation. or 1-800-387-9983 (French) NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian services support: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance • U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca or call: 1-877-324-9091

257 258 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 260 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . .260 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...... 262 FCA US LLC Customer Center...... 260 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or In The 50 United States And FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....260 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)...... 261 Washington, D.C...... 262 In Mexico Contact ...... 260 Service Contract ...... 261 In Canada ...... 262 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...... 262

259 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the manufacturer's cus- In Mexico Contact tomer center should include the following infor- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are mation: vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want Sante Fe C.P. 05109 you to be happy with our products and services. • Owner's name and address • Owner's telephone number (home and office) Mexico, D. F. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take • Authorized dealer name In Mexico City: 5081-7568 the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special FCA US LLC Customer Center Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC tools, and the latest information to ensure the P.O. Box 21–8004 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. P.O. Box 191857 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 This is why you should always talk to an autho- San Juan 00919-1857 rized dealer service manager first. Most matters Phone: (800) 423-6343 can be resolved with this process. Tel.: (787) 782-5757 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, Fax: (787) 782-3345 talk to the general manager or owner of the P.O. Box 1621 authorized dealer. They want to know if you Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 need assistance. Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the (800) 387-9983 French concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

260 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or If you purchased a manufacturer's service con- We appreciate that you have made a major Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) tract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an investment when you purchased the vehicle. An Owner Identification Card in the mail within authorized dealer has also made a major invest- To assist customers who have hearing difficul- three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure ties, the manufacturer has installed special have any questions about the service contract, that you are absolutely delighted with the own- TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) call the manufacturer's Service Contract Na- ership experience. You will be pleased with their equipment at its customer center. Any hearing tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or or speech impaired customer, who has access to (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng- related concerns. a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in lish / (800) 387-9983 French). the United States, can communicate with the WARNING! manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's Engine exhaust (internal combustion en- Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that service contract. It is not responsible for any gines only), some of its constituents, and require assistance can use the special needs service contract other than the manufacturer's certain vehicle components contain, or emit, relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY service contract. If you purchased a service chemicals known to the State of California to teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice contract that is not a manufacturer's service cause cancer and birth defects, or other re- callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a contract, and you require service after the productive harm. In addition, certain fluids Bell Relay Service operator. manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty contained in vehicles and certain products of Service Contract expires, please refer to the contract documents, component wear contain, or emit, chemicals and contact the person listed in those docu- known to the State of California to cause You may have purchased a service contract for a ments. cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc- vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of tive harm. unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts.

261 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual, In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Book- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write let. United States customers may visit the Dodge If you believe that your vehicle has a Contact Us page at www.dodge.com scroll to the defect that could cause a crash or cause to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New bottom of the page and select the “Contact injury or death, you should immediately Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Us” link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and inform the National Highway Traffic Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also Glove Compartment Material” from the left Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- obtain other information about motor menu. You can also purchase a copy by calling vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 tion to notifying FCA US LLC. (Canada). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it In Canada • Replacement User Guide kits or DVDs or, if you may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a prefer, additional printed copies of the Owner's CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the vehicles, it may order a recall and rem- be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com Customer Service Department immedi- or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or edy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot ately. Canadian customers who wish to 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master become involved in individual problems report a safety defect to the Canadian Card, American Express and Discover orders between you, your authorized dealer or government should contact Transport are accepted. FCA US LLC. Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga- NOTE: tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 • The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites. • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/ Service Manuals”, then select your desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.

262 INDEX

Accessories ...... 199 Air Conditioning ...... 35 AWD Mopar ...... 199 Air Conditioning Controls ...... 35 Towing ...... 157 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Conditioning Filter ...... 41 Axle Fluid...... 194, 196, 198 Off...... 121, 123 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 40 Axle Lubrication ...... 194, 196, 198 On...... 121, 123 Air Conditioning System ...... 35, 40 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Pressure, Tires ...... 178 Back-Up ...... 126 (Cruise Control) ...... 120 Alarm Battery ...... 59, 151 Adding Fuel ...... 128 Arm The System ...... 17 Charging System Light ...... 59 Additives, Fuel ...... 129 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 17, 61 Jump Starting ...... 151 Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...... 17 AirBag...... 86 Location ...... 151 All Wheel Drive Advance Front Air Bag ...... 86 Belts, Seat...... 106 Towing ...... 157 Air Bag Operation ...... 87 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 70 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...... 192, 193 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 85 B-Pillar Location ...... 175 Anti-Lock Warning Light...... 63 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 88 Brake Fluid...... 194, 196, 198 Arming System (Security Alarm) ...... 17 Enhanced Accident Response . . .92, 158 Brake System Audio Jack...... 232 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 158 Fluid Check ...... 194, 196, 198 Automatic Headlights ...... 32 Front Air Bag ...... 86 Warning Light ...... 58 Automatic High Beams ...... 31 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 91 Bulb Replacement ...... 132 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....40 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 88 Bulbs, Light ...... 108, 132 Automatic Transmission ...... 112 Maintaining Your Air Bag System ....92 Adding Fluid ...... 194, 196, 198 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ....85 Camera ...... 126 Fluid Type ...... 194, 196, 198 Side Air Bags ...... 88 Camera, Rear ...... 126 Autostick Transporting Pets ...... 105 Capacities, Fluid ...... 192, 193 Operation ...... 114 Air Bag Light ...... 58, 85, 106 Caps, Filler Air Bag Maintenance...... 92 Oil (Engine) ...... 167 263 Carbon Monoxide Warning...... 106 Cooling System Electronic Throttle Control Changing A Flat Tire ...... 141, 171 Coolant Capacity ...... 192, 193 Warning Light ...... 60 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 172 Selection Of Coolant Emergency, In Case Of INDEX Check Engine Light (Malfunction (Antifreeze) ...... 192, 193, 194, 196 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...... 156 Indicator Light) ...... 67 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...... 118 Jacking ...... 141, 171 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...... 105 Cruise Light ...... 65 Jump Starting ...... 151, 152 Checks, Safety ...... 105 Customer Assistance ...... 260 Towing ...... 157 Child Restraint ...... 93 Customer Programmable Features .....223 Emission Control System Maintenance . . .67 Child Restraints Engine ...... 167, 168, 169, 170 Booster Seats ...... 96 Deck Lid, Power Release ...... 45 Compartment ...... 167, 168, 170 Child Restraints ...... 93 Defroster, Windshield ...... 107 Compartment Identification . . .167, 169 Child Seat Installation ...... 103 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 66 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 194, 196 How To Stow An Unused ALR Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 31 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 106 Seat Belt ...... 101 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 157 Infants And Child Restraints ...... 95 Disturb...... 247 Jump Starting ...... 151, 152 Lower Anchors And Tethers Door Ajar ...... 59 Oil...... 192, 193, 194, 196 For Children ...... 98 Door Ajar Light ...... 59 Oil Filler Cap ...... 167 Older Children And Child Restraints . . .95 Drive Modes ...... 116, 223 Oil Selection ...... 192, 193 Seating Positions ...... 97 Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 21 Overheating ...... 153 Cleaning Starting ...... 110 Wheels ...... 185 E-85 Fuel ...... 191 Enhanced Accident Response Climate Control ...... 35 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 50 Feature ...... 92, 158 Manual ...... 35 Electronic Power Distribution Center Ethanol ...... 191 Compact Spare Tire ...... 183 (Fuses) ...... 134 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 106 Contract, Service ...... 261 Electronic Speed Control Exhaust System...... 106 (Cruise Control) ...... 118 Exterior Lighting ...... 31 Exterior Lights ...... 31, 108

264 Filters Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ...... 241 Key Fob Air Conditioning ...... 41 Headlights Arm The Alarm ...... 17 Engine Oil ...... 194, 196 Automatic ...... 32 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 18 Flashers High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . .31 Passive Entry ...... 18 Turn Signal ...... 33, 65, 108 On With Wipers ...... 32 Passive Entry Programming ...... 18 Flash-To-Pass ...... 32 Passing ...... 32 Key, Replacement ...... 14 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Switch ...... 31 Keys ...... 12 Fuel Requirements ...... 191 Head Restraints ...... 26, 27 Fluid, Brake ...... 194, 196, 198 Head Rests...... 26, 27 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 33 Lane Change Assist ...... 33 Fluid Capacities ...... 192, 193 Heater ...... 35 LaneSense...... 125 Fluid Leaks ...... 108 High Beam/Low Beam Select Lap/Shoulder Belts...... 79 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 194, 196 (Dimmer) Switch ...... 31 Latches ...... 108 Folding Rear Seat ...... 21, 25 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...... 47 Hood ...... 44 Forward Collision Warning...... 71 Hood Prop...... 44 Leaks, Fluid ...... 108 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 156 Hood Release ...... 44 Life Of Tires ...... 181 Fuel Light Bulbs ...... 108, 132 Additives ...... 129 Information Center, Vehicle ...... 56 Lights ...... 108 Ethanol ...... 191 Instrument Cluster ...... 65 AirBag ...... 58, 85, 106 Materials Added ...... 129 Interior Lights...... 33 Automatic Headlights ...... 32 Octane Rating ...... 194, 196 Introduction ...... 1 Brake Warning ...... 58 Specifications ...... 194, 196 iPod/USB/MP3 Control Bulb Replacement ...... 132 Tank Capacity ...... 192, 193 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 241 Cruise ...... 65 Fuel, Flexible ...... 191 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 31 Fuses...... 134 Jack Location ...... 141 Engine Temperature Warning ...... 60 Jack Operation ...... 141, 171 Exterior ...... 108 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...... 47 Jump Starting ...... 151, 152

265 Headlights ...... 31 Manual, Service...... 262 ParkSense System, Rear...... 125 Headlights On With Wipers ...... 32 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...... 21 Passing Light ...... 32 Headlight Switch ...... 31 Memory Seat ...... 21 Passive Entry ...... 18 INDEX High Beam ...... 31 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 21 Personalized Menu Bar ...... 207, 215 High Beam/Low Beam Select ...... 31 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 72 Pets ...... 105 Instrument Cluster ...... 31 Mopar ...... 199 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ...... 241 Interior ...... 33 Mopar Accessories ...... 199 Phone (Pairing) ...... 243 Malfunction Indicator Phone (Uconnect) ...... 241 (Check Engine) ...... 61 Navigation ...... 236, 238, 239 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . .175 Park ...... 32, 65 Power Passing ...... 32 Occupant Restraints ...... 77 Deck Lid Release ...... 45 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 60 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . .194, 196 Distribution Center (Fuses) ...... 137 Security Alarm ...... 61 Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...... 57 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ....50 Service ...... 132 Oil, Engine ...... 194, 196 Sunroof ...... 43 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . .62, 72 Capacity ...... 192, 193 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ....29 Turn Signal ...... 33, 65, 108 Filter ...... 194, 196 Power Steering Fluid ...... 194, 196, 198 Warning (Instrument Cluster Pressure Warning Light ...... 60 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...... 82 Description) ...... 60, 65 Recommendation ...... 192, 193 Preparation For Jacking ...... 142 Loading Vehicle Viscosity ...... 192, 193 Pretensioners Tires ...... 175 Oil Pressure Light ...... 60 Seat Belts ...... 83 Low Tire Pressure System ...... 72 Onboard Diagnostic System...... 66 Lug Nuts...... 190 Operating Precautions ...... 66 Radial Ply Tires ...... 179 Overheating, Engine ...... 153 Radio Maintenance Owner's Manual (Operator Manual).....262 Presets ...... 208, 216 Schedule ...... 160, 161, 164, 165 Radio Frequency Malfunction Paddle Shifters ...... 114 General Information ...... 14, 16, 20 Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .61, 67 Paddle Shift Mode ...... 114 Radio Screens ...... 204, 212 266 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 34 Safety Information, Tire ...... 171 Rear Seat ...... 79 Rear Camera ...... 126 Safety Tips...... 105 Reminder ...... 60 Rear Cross Path ...... 70 Schedule, Maintenance.....160, 161, 164 Untwisting Procedure ...... 81 Rear ParkSense System ...... 125 Seat Belt Seats ...... 21, 24 Rear Seat, Folding...... 21, 25 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Adjustment ...... 21 Rear Wheel Drive Anchorage ...... 81 Easy Entry ...... 21, 23 Towing ...... 158 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . .83 Head Restraints ...... 26, 27 Recreational Towing ...... 130 Energy Management Feature ...... 83 Heated ...... 21, 24 Release, Hood ...... 44 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...... 80 Memory ...... 21 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 78 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 79 Rear Folding ...... 21, 25 Remote Keyless Entry Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...... 81 Seatback Release ...... 21, 25 Arm The Alarm ...... 17 Pregnant Women ...... 82 Tilting ...... 21 Remote Trunk Release ...... 45 Seat Belt Extender ...... 82 Vented ...... 21, 25 Replacement Bulbs ...... 132 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 83 Ventilated ...... 21, 25 Replacement Keys ...... 14 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 78 Security Alarm ...... 17, 61 Replacement Tires ...... 181 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 78 Arm The System ...... 17 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 262 Seat Belts...... 78, 106 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . .194, 196 Restraint, Head ...... 26, 27 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 81 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 14 Restraints, Child ...... 93 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Service Assistance ...... 260 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ...... 156 Anchorage ...... 81 Service Contract ...... 261 RWD Child Restraint ...... 93 Service Manuals ...... 262 Towing ...... 158 Extender ...... 82 Shifting ...... 111 Front Seat ...... 78, 79, 80 Automatic Transmission .....111, 112 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 106 Inspection ...... 106 Shoulder Belts ...... 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 108 Operating Instructions ...... 80 Signals, Turn ...... 33, 65, 108 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 262 Pregnant Women ...... 82 Sirius Satellite Radio Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 106 Pretensioners ...... 83 Traffic & Weather ...... 239 267 Sirius Travel Link ...... 240 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 118 Compact Spare ...... 183 SiriusXM Guardian ...... 225 Sport Mode ...... 117 Flat Changing ...... 145 Account ...... 225 Starting ...... 110 General Information ...... 178, 183 INDEX In Vehicle Features ...... 227 Starting And Operating...... 110 High Speed ...... 179 Maintaining Your Account ...... 227 Starting Procedures ...... 110 Inflation Pressures ...... 178 Registration ...... 226 Steering ...... 29 Jacking ...... 141, 142, 171 Remote Features ...... 230 Column Lock ...... 29 Life Of Tires ...... 181 Renewing Subscriptions ...... 227 Tilt Column ...... 29 Load Capacity ...... 175 Send&Go...... 232 Wheel, Heated ...... 30 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....72 Vehicle Finder ...... 232 Wheel, Tilt ...... 29 Pressure Warning Light ...... 62 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 254 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 225 Quality Grading ...... 186 Snow Tires...... 182 Storage, Vehicle ...... 41 Radial ...... 179 Sound Systems Stuck, Freeing ...... 156 Replacement ...... 145, 181 (Radio) ...... 232, 236, 238, 239 Sun Roof ...... 43 Safety ...... 171, 178 Spare Tire ...... 141, 183, 184 Supplemental Restraint System - Sizes ...... 172 Spark Plugs...... 194, 196 AirBag...... 86 Snow Tires ...... 182 Specifications Spare Tire ...... 141, 183, 184 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 194, 196 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 29 Spinning ...... 180 Oil...... 194, 196 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)....40 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 180 Speed Control Text Messaging ...... 247 Wheel Mounting ...... 145 Accel/Decel ...... 119, 120 Tilt Steering Column ...... 29 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 190 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 121 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . .175 Tire Safety Information...... 171 Cancel ...... 120 Tire Markings ...... 171 Tire Service Kit . . .146, 147, 148, 150, 151 Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...... 123 Tires ...... 108, 178, 183, 186 To Open Hood ...... 44 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ...... 123 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 181 Towing ...... 130 Resume ...... 120 Air Pressure ...... 178 Behind A Motorhome ...... 130 Set...... 119 Changing ...... 141, 145, 171 Disabled Vehicle ...... 157 268 Guide ...... 130 Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display ...... 204 IVH...... 11 Recreational ...... 130 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) Navigation ...... 11 Weight ...... 130 Making A Phone Call ...... 241, 246 Operating Instructions ...... 11 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome. . . .130 Receiving A Call ...... 241 Searching User Guide ...... 11 Trailer Towing ...... 130 Uconnect Phone ...... 241, 246, 247 Voice Command...... 246 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 130 Uconnect Settings Voice Recognition Trailer Weight ...... 130 Customer Programmable Features ....18 System (VR)...... 246, 247, 249 Transfer Case Passive Entry Programming ...... 18 Fluid ...... 194, 196 Uconnect Voice Command ...... 246, 249 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Transmission ...... 112 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 186 Description) ...... 62 Automatic ...... 112 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 81 Wheel And Wheel Trim...... 185 Fluid ...... 194, 196, 198 USB Port ...... 232 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care...... 185 Shifting ...... 111 Window Fogging ...... 41 Transporting Pets ...... 105 Vehicle Loading ...... 175 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 180 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . .17 Windshield Defroster ...... 107 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...... 45 Vehicle Storage ...... 41 Windshield Washers ...... 33 Trunk Release Remote Control ...... 45 Vehicle User Guide Windshield Wipers ...... 33 Turn Signals ...... 33, 65 ICON Symbol Glossary ...... 11 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 34 In Vehicle Help ...... 11

269 270 271 272 DODGE.COM (U.S.) IMPORTANT DODGE.CA (CANADA)

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of a convenient reference source for common questions. However, the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable For additional information on accessories to help personalize to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca WARNING! states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility (Canada) or your local Dodge brand dealer. Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions to comply with all local laws. are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go 2018 directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only). DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY CHARGER www.dodge.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, MANUAL, MEDIA AND WARRANTY customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records BOOKLET BY VISITING: and more. To get this information, just create an account USER and check back often. WWW.MOPAR.COM/EN-US/CARE/OWNER-MANUAL.HTML Get warranty and other information online – you can review (U.S. RESIDENTS); and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, GUIDE Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties WWW.OWNERS.MOPAR.CA USER GUIDE FIRST EDITION CHARGER provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting 18LD-926-AA www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). (CANADIAN RESIDENTS). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or owners.mopar.ca (Canada) DODGE.COM (U.S.) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. DODGE.CA (CANADA)